CA2373027A1 - Absorbent article with skin care composition - Google Patents
Absorbent article with skin care composition Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- CA2373027A1 CA2373027A1 CA002373027A CA2373027A CA2373027A1 CA 2373027 A1 CA2373027 A1 CA 2373027A1 CA 002373027 A CA002373027 A CA 002373027A CA 2373027 A CA2373027 A CA 2373027A CA 2373027 A1 CA2373027 A1 CA 2373027A1
- Authority
- CA
- Canada
- Prior art keywords
- skin care
- absorbent article
- care composition
- aliphatic hydrocarbons
- skin
- Prior art date
- Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
- Abandoned
Links
Classifications
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61Q—SPECIFIC USE OF COSMETICS OR SIMILAR TOILETRY PREPARATIONS
- A61Q17/00—Barrier preparations; Preparations brought into direct contact with the skin for affording protection against external influences, e.g. sunlight, X-rays or other harmful rays, corrosive materials, bacteria or insect stings
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61F—FILTERS IMPLANTABLE INTO BLOOD VESSELS; PROSTHESES; DEVICES PROVIDING PATENCY TO, OR PREVENTING COLLAPSING OF, TUBULAR STRUCTURES OF THE BODY, e.g. STENTS; ORTHOPAEDIC, NURSING OR CONTRACEPTIVE DEVICES; FOMENTATION; TREATMENT OR PROTECTION OF EYES OR EARS; BANDAGES, DRESSINGS OR ABSORBENT PADS; FIRST-AID KITS
- A61F13/00—Bandages or dressings; Absorbent pads
- A61F13/15—Absorbent pads, e.g. sanitary towels, swabs or tampons for external or internal application to the body; Supporting or fastening means therefor; Tampon applicators
- A61F13/84—Accessories, not otherwise provided for, for absorbent pads
- A61F13/8405—Additives, e.g. for odour, disinfectant or pH control
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
- A61K8/00—Cosmetics or similar toiletry preparations
- A61K8/02—Cosmetics or similar toiletry preparations characterised by special physical form
- A61K8/0208—Tissues; Wipes; Patches
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61L—METHODS OR APPARATUS FOR STERILISING MATERIALS OR OBJECTS IN GENERAL; DISINFECTION, STERILISATION OR DEODORISATION OF AIR; CHEMICAL ASPECTS OF BANDAGES, DRESSINGS, ABSORBENT PADS OR SURGICAL ARTICLES; MATERIALS FOR BANDAGES, DRESSINGS, ABSORBENT PADS OR SURGICAL ARTICLES
- A61L15/00—Chemical aspects of, or use of materials for, bandages, dressings or absorbent pads
- A61L15/16—Bandages, dressings or absorbent pads for physiological fluids such as urine or blood, e.g. sanitary towels, tampons
- A61L15/18—Bandages, dressings or absorbent pads for physiological fluids such as urine or blood, e.g. sanitary towels, tampons containing inorganic materials
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61L—METHODS OR APPARATUS FOR STERILISING MATERIALS OR OBJECTS IN GENERAL; DISINFECTION, STERILISATION OR DEODORISATION OF AIR; CHEMICAL ASPECTS OF BANDAGES, DRESSINGS, ABSORBENT PADS OR SURGICAL ARTICLES; MATERIALS FOR BANDAGES, DRESSINGS, ABSORBENT PADS OR SURGICAL ARTICLES
- A61L15/00—Chemical aspects of, or use of materials for, bandages, dressings or absorbent pads
- A61L15/16—Bandages, dressings or absorbent pads for physiological fluids such as urine or blood, e.g. sanitary towels, tampons
- A61L15/22—Bandages, dressings or absorbent pads for physiological fluids such as urine or blood, e.g. sanitary towels, tampons containing macromolecular materials
- A61L15/34—Oils, fats, waxes or natural resins
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61Q—SPECIFIC USE OF COSMETICS OR SIMILAR TOILETRY PREPARATIONS
- A61Q19/00—Preparations for care of the skin
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61F—FILTERS IMPLANTABLE INTO BLOOD VESSELS; PROSTHESES; DEVICES PROVIDING PATENCY TO, OR PREVENTING COLLAPSING OF, TUBULAR STRUCTURES OF THE BODY, e.g. STENTS; ORTHOPAEDIC, NURSING OR CONTRACEPTIVE DEVICES; FOMENTATION; TREATMENT OR PROTECTION OF EYES OR EARS; BANDAGES, DRESSINGS OR ABSORBENT PADS; FIRST-AID KITS
- A61F13/00—Bandages or dressings; Absorbent pads
- A61F13/15—Absorbent pads, e.g. sanitary towels, swabs or tampons for external or internal application to the body; Supporting or fastening means therefor; Tampon applicators
- A61F13/15203—Properties of the article, e.g. stiffness or absorbency
- A61F2013/15284—Properties of the article, e.g. stiffness or absorbency characterized by quantifiable properties
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61F—FILTERS IMPLANTABLE INTO BLOOD VESSELS; PROSTHESES; DEVICES PROVIDING PATENCY TO, OR PREVENTING COLLAPSING OF, TUBULAR STRUCTURES OF THE BODY, e.g. STENTS; ORTHOPAEDIC, NURSING OR CONTRACEPTIVE DEVICES; FOMENTATION; TREATMENT OR PROTECTION OF EYES OR EARS; BANDAGES, DRESSINGS OR ABSORBENT PADS; FIRST-AID KITS
- A61F13/00—Bandages or dressings; Absorbent pads
- A61F13/15—Absorbent pads, e.g. sanitary towels, swabs or tampons for external or internal application to the body; Supporting or fastening means therefor; Tampon applicators
- A61F13/15203—Properties of the article, e.g. stiffness or absorbency
- A61F2013/15284—Properties of the article, e.g. stiffness or absorbency characterized by quantifiable properties
- A61F2013/15365—Dimensions
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61F—FILTERS IMPLANTABLE INTO BLOOD VESSELS; PROSTHESES; DEVICES PROVIDING PATENCY TO, OR PREVENTING COLLAPSING OF, TUBULAR STRUCTURES OF THE BODY, e.g. STENTS; ORTHOPAEDIC, NURSING OR CONTRACEPTIVE DEVICES; FOMENTATION; TREATMENT OR PROTECTION OF EYES OR EARS; BANDAGES, DRESSINGS OR ABSORBENT PADS; FIRST-AID KITS
- A61F13/00—Bandages or dressings; Absorbent pads
- A61F13/15—Absorbent pads, e.g. sanitary towels, swabs or tampons for external or internal application to the body; Supporting or fastening means therefor; Tampon applicators
- A61F13/53—Absorbent pads, e.g. sanitary towels, swabs or tampons for external or internal application to the body; Supporting or fastening means therefor; Tampon applicators characterised by the absorbing medium
- A61F2013/530437—Absorbent pads, e.g. sanitary towels, swabs or tampons for external or internal application to the body; Supporting or fastening means therefor; Tampon applicators characterised by the absorbing medium having a part with elevated absorption means
- A61F2013/530445—Absorbent pads, e.g. sanitary towels, swabs or tampons for external or internal application to the body; Supporting or fastening means therefor; Tampon applicators characterised by the absorbing medium having a part with elevated absorption means by defining a target or acquisition or vulnerability zone
Landscapes
- Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
- Life Sciences & Earth Sciences (AREA)
- General Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
- Veterinary Medicine (AREA)
- Public Health (AREA)
- Animal Behavior & Ethology (AREA)
- Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
- Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
- Epidemiology (AREA)
- Materials Engineering (AREA)
- Hematology (AREA)
- Dermatology (AREA)
- Biomedical Technology (AREA)
- Inorganic Chemistry (AREA)
- Birds (AREA)
- Heart & Thoracic Surgery (AREA)
- Vascular Medicine (AREA)
- Oil, Petroleum & Natural Gas (AREA)
- Absorbent Articles And Supports Therefor (AREA)
- Orthopedics, Nursing, And Contraception (AREA)
Abstract
An absorbent article comprising a body contacting surface and an absorbent core is disclosed. At least a portion of the body contacting surface compris es an effective amount of a skin care composition which is solid or semisolid a t 40 ~C and which is transferable from the body contacting surface to the wearer's skin by contact, normal wearer motion and body heat at a level effective in providing a skin benefit to the wearer's skin. The skin care composition has viscosity of more than about 105 Poise under shear stress of less than about 3X104 dynes/cm2, and viscosity of less than about 102 Poise under shear stress of more than about 106 dynes/cm2, at 40 ~C.
Description
WO 00/69484 cA o23~302~ 2ooi-m-o2 PCT/US00/13842 ABSORBENT ARTICLE WITH SKIN CARE COMPOSITION
TECHNICAL FIELD
This application relates to absorbent articles including, but not limited to, feminine hygiene garments such as sanitary napkins and panti-liners, diapers, training pants, adult incontinence devices, diaper holders, and the like. More particularly, the present invention relates to absorbent articles having a skin care composition coating on the body contacting surface of the absorbent article that is transferable to the wearer's skin.
BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION
All manner and variety of absorbent articles configured for the absorption of body fluids such as menses, urine and feces are, of course, well known. With respect to feminine protection devices, the art has offered two basic types; sanitary napkins have been developed for external wear about the pudendal region while tampons have been developed for internal wear within the vaginal cavity for interruption of menstrual flow therefrom. Such tampon devices are disclosed in U.S. Patent No. 4,412,833, entitled "Tampon Applicator", issued to Weigner, et al. on November 1, 1983, and U.S.
Patent WO 00/69484 cA o23~302~ 2ooi-m-o2 PCT/US00/13842 No. 4,413,986, entitled "Tampon Assembly With Means For Sterile Insertion", issued to Jacobs on November 8, 1983.
Hybrid devices which attempt to merge the structural features of the sanitary napkins and the tampons into a single device have also been proposed. Such hybrid devices are disclosed in U.S. Patent No. 2,092,346, entitled "Catamenial Pad", issued to Arone on September 7, 1937, and U.S. Patent No. 3,905,372, entitled "Feminine Hygiene Protective Shield", issued to Denkinger on September 16, 1975. Other less intrusive hybrid devices are known as labial or interlabial sanitary napkins and are characterized by having a portion which at least partially resides within the wearer's vestibule and a portion which at least partially resides external of the wearer's vestibule. Such devices are disclosed in U.S. Patent No. 2,662,527, entitled "Sanitary Pad", issued to Jacks on December 15, 1953, and U.S. Patent No. 4,631,062, entitled "Labial Sanitary Pad", issued to Lassen, et al. on December 23, 1986. Interlabial pads have the potential to provide even greater freedom from inconvenience because of their small size and reduced risk of leakage. Numerous attempts have been made in the past to produce an interlabial pad which would combine the best features of tampons and sanitary napkins while avoiding at least some of the disadvantages associated with each of these types of devices. Examples of such devices are described in U.S. Patent 2,917,049 issued to Delaney on December 15, 1959, U.S. Patent 3,420,235 issued to Harmon on January 7, 1969, U.S.
Patent 4,595,392 issued to Johnson, et al. on June 17, 1986, and U.S. Patent 5,484,429 issued to Vukos, et al. on January 16, 1996. A commercially available interlabial device is FRESH
'N FIT~ PADETTE interlabial product which is marketed by Athena Medical Corp.
of Portland, OR and described in U.S. Patents 3,983,873 and 4,175,561 issued to Hirschman on October 5, 1976 and November 27, 1979, respectively.
Although these products such as sanitary napkins, tampons and interlabial pads are effective generally to absorb menses, there are still discomfort which need to be solved.
For example, the wearer feels uncomfortable due to; (1) frictional discomfort associated with rubbing of the product against the wearer's skin while wearing/applying the product;
(2) adherence of the menses discharged onto the topsheet to the wearer's skin;
and (3) adherence of the surface of the product such as a topsheet to the wearer's skin. The friction when applying the product prevents the product from being properly inserted/applied, leading to discomfort. In addition, rubbing of the product against the wearer's skin causes itch and/or skin irntation. The adherence of the menses gives the wearer messy/dirty feeling. In addition, enzyme and/or microbial contained in the adhered menses attack the wearer's skin, thereby causing itch and/or skin irritation. The WO 00/69484 cA o23~302~ 2ooi-m-o2 PCT/CTS00/13842 adherence of the topsheet gives the wearer sticky feeling. It also hinders the wearer's skin from air circulation, thereby causing skin overhydration.
European Patent Application EP 0 692 263 A2, "Method of reducing the coefficient of friction of absorbent products and wax coated products produced thereby", is directed to lubricated absorbent products having a coating of a small amount of high molecular weight solid waxy substance which has a softening point above body temperature. However, there are drawbacks associated with the use of high molecular weight materials for this purpose. High molecular weight materials will not be as soothing or lotion-like to the wearer's skin as lower molecular weight materials. In addition, high molecular weight materials will not be capable of transfernng to the wearer's skin to provide skin care benefits. High molecular weight waxes can also become brittle and tend to flake or chip off an absorbent article due to their lack of flexibility if the absorbent article is of a type that is required to flex and bend. Further, if the softening point of such materials is higher than room temperature, application of such materials to an absorbent article will be more difficult, and will require that the material be heated in order to coat an absorbent article with such a material.
The problem of drying of a female wearer's labial vestibule area has been discussed in the patent literature. For example, U.S. Patent 4,846,824 issued to Lassen, et al. on July 11, 1989, is directed to a labial sanitary pad that has a "physiologically hydrous" cover (that is, a cover material supposedly designed to "maintain a moist interface between the tissues of the vestibule and the pad"). Types of cover materials specified in the Lassen, et al. patent include a spunlaced polyester fiber nonwoven and a rayon cover. The Lassen, et al. patent states that the covers can be provided with various "coatings" to maintain the physiologically hydrous feature, but no specific coatings appear to be disclosed.
Other types of absorbent articles are e.g., disposable diapers and incontinent briefs or undergarments to absorb and contain body exudates. Such articles are thus intended to prevent body exudates from soiling, wetting, or otherwise contaminating clothing or other articles, such as bedding, that come in contact with the wearer. The most common mode of failure for such products occurs when body exudates leak out of the gaps between the article and the wearer's legs or waist to adjacent clothing because they are not immediately absorbed within the article and the absorbent article is not able to sustain a good fit on the wearer such that gaps are created allowing the exudates to leak out of the article. For example, urine tends to be deposited onto the topsheet in gushes such that the urine 4 cA o23~302~ 2ooi-ii-o2 pCT/US00/13842 migrates to the gaps between the article and the wearer where it can come in contact with clothing or other articles and be absorbed by these articles. Additionally, loose fecal material that is not easily absorbed by the absorbent article tends to "float"
on the body contacting surface and work its way past the gaps between the article and the legs or waist of the wearer.
Contemporary disposable diapers have a topsheet, a backsheet, an absorbent core, and one or more cuffs, typically elastic cuffs, positioned to contact the legs and/or waist of the wearer. These elastic cuffs prove effective generally to prevent wicking and overflow from the fluid laden diaper to clothing contacting the edges of the diaper in that the elastic cuffs present a barrier between the edge of the diaper and the contacting clothing, and generally in addition, provide a gasketing action about the legs or waist of the wearer to maintain a seal about the leg or waist and minimize gapping. However, because the forces generated by the elastic members are concentrated along a narrow area resulting in high localized pressures, such elastic cuffs have an increased tendency to indent and mark the skin of the wearer. These skin effects are particularly acute for products worn by infants and incontinent elderly adults due to the tenderness of their skin and its sensitivity to even slight pressures or rubbing actions. These skin effects are even further acute due to the occlusion of the skin caused by such products. The occlusion of the skin by the diaper can potentially lead to skin overhydration. As a result, overhydrated skin is more susceptible to damage from abrasion due to rubbing caused by normal wearer movements and contact with the elastic cuffs. It is also generally known that overhydrated skin is more susceptible to skin disorders, including diaper rash, erythema, heat rash, abrasion, pressure marks, and skin burner loss. The reduced barrier efficiency of abraded, overhydrated skin can further cause an increase in diaper rash. (21 C.F.R.
333.503 defines diaper rash as "[a]n inflammatory skin condition in the diaper area (perineum, buttocks, lower abdomen, and inner thighs) caused by one or more of the following factors: moisture, occlusion, chafing, continued contact with urine or feces or both, or mechanical or chemical irritation.") To address the concerns of skin disorders associated with wearing diapers and other absorbent articles, the caregiver or wearer often applies skin protective and/or therapeutic products to the buttocks, genitals, anal and/or other regions before placing the absorbent article on the wearer. This procedure usually involves the caregiver applying the skin protective product to their hands, and then wiping the same on the skin of the wearer. To eliminate the need for this wasteful, messy, time consuming, and easily forgotten procedure, there have been attempts to prepare absorbent articles which contain a skin care substance on the article's topsheet.
WO 00/69484 cA o23~302~ 2ooi-ii-o2 pCT/US00/13842 For example, one substance that has been applied to diaper products to impart a soothing, protective coating is mineral oil. Mineral oil is a mixture of various liquid hydrocarbons obtained by distilling the high-boiling (i.e., 300°-390°C) fractions in petroleum. Mineral oil is liquid at ambient temperatures, e.g. 20°-25°C. As a result, 5 mineral oil is relatively fluid and mobile when applied to diapers. Because mineral oil is fluid and mobile at ambient temperatures, it tends not to remain localized on the surface ' of the diaper, but instead migrates into the interior of the diaper.
Accordingly, relatively high levels of mineral oil need to be applied to the diaper to provide the desired therapeutic or protective coating benefits. This leads not only to increased costs for these treated diaper products, but other detrimental effects as well, including decreased absorbency of the underlying absorbent core.
Even without increasing its level, the tendency of mineral oil to migrate once applied has other detrimental effects. For example, the applied mineral oil can transfer to, into and through the packaging or wrapper material for the treated diaper product. This can create the need for barrier-type packaging or wrapper films to avoid smearing or other leakage of mineral oil from the diaper product.
Thus, it would be desirable to provide an absorbent article having a body contacting surface wherein a skin care composition is disposed thereon to provide improved skin care benefits, particularly in skin regions in contact with the wearer during use. The skin care composition is preferably as stable as possible before use of the absorbent article such that the skin care composition remains on the body contacting surface of the absorbent article. It is also preferable that, once the absorbent article is applied to the wearer's body, the skin care composition is easily transferable to the wearer's skin to provide these skin benefits.
Thus, there is a need for an absorbent article having a body contacting surface with a skin care composition disposed thereon that: (1) provides skin benefits; and (2) is as stable as possible before use of the absorbent article while transferable to the wearer's skin once the absorbent article is applied to the wearer's body.
SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION
The present invention relates to an absorbent article comprising a body contacting surface and an absorbent core. At least a portion of the body contacting surface comprises an effective amount of a skin care composition which is solid or semisolid at WO 00/69484 cA o23~302~ 2ooi-m-o2 PCT/LTS00/13842 40°C and which is transferable from the body contacting surface to the wearer's skin by contact, normal wearer motion and body heat at a level effective in providing a skin benefit to the wearer's skin. The skin care composition has viscosity of more than about 105 Poise under shear stress of less than about 3X104 dynes/cm2, and viscosity of less than about 102 Poise under shear stress of more than about 106 dynes/cm2, at 40°C.
The present invention also relates to an absorbent article comprising a body contacting surface and an absorbent core. At least a portion of the body contacting surface comprises an effective amount of a skin care composition which is solid or semisolid at 40°C and which is transferable from the body contacting surface to the wearer's skin by contact, normal wearer motion and body heat at a level effective in providing a skin benefit to the wearer's skin. The skin care composition comprises a skin care active ingredient. The skin care composition has viscosity of more than about 105 Poise under shear stress of less than about 3X104 dynes/cm2, and viscosity of less than about 102 Poise under shear stress of more than about 106 dynes/cm2, at 40°C.
BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS
While the specification concludes with claims particularly pointing out and distinctly claiming the subject matter which is regarded as forming the present invention, it is believed that the invention will be better understood from the following description which is taken in conjunction with the accompanying drawings in which:
FIG. 1 is an absorbent article in the form of a sanitary napkin according to the present invention;
FIG. 2 is a lateral cross-sectional view taken along line 2-2 of the sanitary napkin shown in FIG. 1;
FIG. 3 is a lateral cross-sectional view taken along line 3-3 of FIG. 1 through the center portion of one of the flaps;
FIG. 4 is a top plan view of the absorbent article shown in FIG. 1 with showing areas applied skin care composition; and FIG. 5 is a graph of shear stress vs. viscosity of one example of skin care composition.
WO 00/69484 cA o23~302~ 2ooi-m-o2 PCT/US00/13842 DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION
All cited references are incorporated herein by reference in their entireties.
Citation of any reference is not an admission regarding any determination as to its availability as prior art to the claimed invention.
"Comprising" means that other steps and other elements which do not affect the end result can be added. This term encompasses the terms "consisting of" and "consisting essentially of '.
All percentages, ratios and proportions used herein are by weight unless otherwise specified.
A. Absorbent Article Herein "absorbent article" refers to devices which absorb and contain body exudates, and more specifically, refers to devices which are placed against the skin of a wearer to absorb and contain the various exudates discharged from the body.
Herein "disposable" is used to describe absorbent articles which are not intended to be laundered or otherwise restored or reused as an absorbent article after a single use.
Examples of disposable absorbent articles include feminine hygiene garments such as sanitary napkins and panti-liners, diapers, incontinence briefs, diaper holders, training pants, and the like.
Disposable absorbent articles typically comprise a liquid pervious topsheet, a liquid impervious backsheet joined to the topsheet and an absorbent core positioned between the topsheet and the backsheet. Disposable absorbent articles and components thereof, including the topsheet, backsheet, absorbent core, and any individual layers of these components, have a body surface and a garment surface. Herein "body surface"
means that surface of the article or component which is intended to be worn toward or adjacent to the body of the wearer, while the "garment surface" is on the opposite side and is intended to be worn toward or placed adjacent to the wearer's body or undergarments when the disposable absorbent article is worn.
As used herein, the term "body contacting surface" of an absorbent article is one or more surfaces of any article components that contact the wearer at some time during the wear period. Body contacting surfaces include, but are not limited to, portions of the topsheet, flaps, leg cuffs, waist region, side panels, fastening tabs, etc., which contact a wearer during use.
WO 00/69484 cA o23~302~ 2ooi-m-o2 PCT/US00/13842 The following description generally discusses the absorbent core, topsheet, and backsheet materials that are useful in disposable absorbent articles, though disposable absorbent article does not necessarily need to have all of them. It is to be understood that this general description applies to these components of the specific absorbent articles shown in FIGS. 1-3 and further described below, in addition to those of other disposable absorbent articles which are generally described herein.
In general, the absorbent core is capable of absorbing or retaining liquids (e.g., menses, urine, and/or other body exudates). The absorbent core is preferably compressible, conformable, and non-irntating to the wearer's skin. The absorbent core may be manufactured in a wide variety of sizes and shapes (e.g., rectangular, oval, hourglass, "T" shaped, dog bone, asymmetric, etc.). The absorbent core may include any of a wide variety of liquid-absorbent materials commonly used in absorbent articles, such as comminuted wood pulp, which is generally referred to as airfelt. Examples of other suitable absorbent materials for use in the absorbent core include creped cellulose wadding; meltblown polymers including coform; chemically stiffened, modified or cross-linked cellulosic fibers; synthetic fibers such as crimped polyester fibers;
peat moss; tissue including tissue wraps and tissue laminates; absorbent foams; absorbent sponges;
superabsorbent polymers; absorbent gelling materials; or any equivalent material or combinations of materials, or mixtures of these.
The configuration and construction of the absorbent core may also be varied (e.g., the absorbent core may have varying caliper zones and/or have a profile so as to be thicker in the center; hydrophilic gradients; gradients of the absorbent composite, superabsorbent gradients; or lower average density and lower average basis weight zones, e.g., acquisition zones; or may comprise one or more layers or structures). The total absorbent capacity of the absorbent core should, however, be compatible with the design loading and the intended use of the absorbent article. Further, the size and absorbent capacity of the absorbent core may be varied to accommodate different uses such as diapers, incontinence pads, pantiliners, regular sanitary napkins, and overnight sanitary napkins, and to accommodate wearers ranging from infants to adults.
The absorbent core can include other absorbent components that are often used in absorbent articles, for example, a dusting layer, a wicking or acquisition layer, or a secondary topsheet for increasing the wearer's comfort.
The topsheet is preferably compliant, soft feeling, and non-irritating to the wearer's skin. Further, the topsheet is liquid pervious, permitting liquids (e.g., menses WO 00/69484 cA o23~302~ 2ooi-m-o2 PCT/US00/13842 and/or urine) to readily penetrate through its thickness. A suitable topsheet may be manufactured from a wide range of materials such as woven and nonwoven materials (e.g., a nonwoven web of fibers); polymeric materials such as apertured formed thermoplastic films, apertured plastic films, and hydroformed thermoplastic films; porous foams; reticulated foams; reticulated thermoplastic films; and thermoplastic scrims.
Suitable woven and nonwoven materials can be comprised of natural fibers (e.g., wood or cotton fibers), synthetic fibers (e.g., polymeric fibers such as polyester, polypropylene, or polyethylene fibers) or from a combination of natural and synthetic fibers.
When the topsheet comprises a nonwoven web, the web may be manufactured by a wide number of known techniques. For example, the web may be spunbonded, carded, wet-laid, melt-blown, hydroentangled, combinations of the above, or the like.
The backsheet is impervious to liquids (e.g., menses and/or urine) and is preferably manufactured from a thin plastic film, although other flexible liquid impervious materials may also be used. Herein "flexible" refers to materials which are compliant and will readily conform to the general shape and contours of the human body.
The backsheet prevents the exudates absorbed and contained in the absorbent core from wetting articles which contact the absorbent article such as bedsheets, pants, pajamas and undergarments. The backsheet may thus comprise a woven or nonwoven material, polymeric films such as thermoplastic films of polyethylene or polypropylene, or composite materials such as a film-coated nonwoven material. A suitable backsheet is a polyethylene film having a thickness of from about 0.012 mm (0.5 mil) to about 0.051 mm (2.0 mils). Exemplary polyethylene films are manufactured by Clopay Corporation of Cincinnati, Ohio, under the designation P18-1401 and by Tredegar Film Products of Terre Haute, Indiana, under the designation XP-39385. The backsheet may be embossed and/or matte finished to provide a more clothlike appearance. Further, the backsheet may permit vapors to escape from the absorbent core (i.e., the backsheet is breathable) while still preventing exudates from passing through the backsheet. The size of the backsheet is dictated by the size of the absorbent core and the exact absorbent article design selected.
The backsheet and the topsheet are positioned adjacent the garment surface and the body surface, respectively, of the absorbent core. The absorbent core is preferably joined with the topsheet, the backsheet, or both in any manner as is known by attachment means such as those well known in the art. However, embodiments of the present invention are envisioned wherein portions of the entire absorbent core are unattached to either the topsheet, the backsheet, or both.
WO 00/69484 cA o23~302~ 2ooi-m-o2 pCT/US00/13842 For example, the topsheet and/or backsheet can be joined to the absorbent core or to each other in any suitable manner known in the art. The term "joined", as used in this specification, encompasses configurations in which an element is directly secured to another element by affixing the element directly to the other element;
configurations in 5 which the element is indirectly secured to the other element by affixing the element to intermediate members) which in turn are affixed to the other element; and configurations in which one element is integral with another element, i.e., one element is essentially part of the other element. The backsheet and/or the topsheet may be joined to the absorbent core or to each other by a uniform continuous layer of adhesive, a patterned layer of 10 adhesive, or an array of separate lines, spirals, or spots of adhesive.
Adhesives which have been found to be satisfactory are manufactured by H. B. Fuller Company of St. Paul, Minnesota under the designation HL-1258 or H-2031. The attachment means will preferably comprise an open pattern network of filaments of adhesive as is disclosed in U.S. Patent 4,573,986, issued to Minetola, et al. on March 4, 1986, and which is incorporated herein by reference. An exemplary attachment means of an open pattern network of filaments comprises several lines of adhesive filaments swirled into a spiral pattern such as illustrated by the apparatus and method shown in U.S. Patent 3,911,173 issued to Sprague, Jr. on October 7, 1975; U.S. Patent 4,785,996 issued to Zwieker, et al.
on November 22, 1978; and U.S. Patent 4,842,666 issued to Werenicz on June 27, 1989.
Each of these patents are incorporated herein by reference. Alternatively, the attachment means may comprise heat bonds, pressure bonds, ultrasonic bonds, dynamic mechanical bonds, or any other suitable attachment means or combinations of these attachment means as are known in the art.
Skin care compositions are applied to at least a portion of the body contacting surface of the absorbent article. The skin care composition may be applied to a portion of or the entirety of the body contacting surface. It is preferable to apply the skin care composition to the entirety of the body contacting surface. Further, the skin care composition may be applied to the garment surface of the absorbent article if desired. The skin care composition may be applied in any suitable configuration, such as a plurality of stripes, a plurality of wave lines, a plurality of dots, etc. Details of the skin care compositions are described below.
A preferred embodiment of an absorbent article is shown in FIG. 1. Shown in FIG.
1 is a sanitary napkin which is one type of feminine protection devices and is used for external wear about the pudendal region of the wearer. As shown in FIG. 1, the sanitary napkin 20 preferably comprises an absorbent means (or "main body portion°') 22, and two WO 00/69484 cA o23~302~ 2ooi-ii-o2 pCT~S00/13842 optional flaps 24. The sanitary napkin 20 has two surfaces, a body-facing surface or "body surface" or and a garment surface 20B. The sanitary napkin 20 is shown in FIG. 1 as viewed from its body surface 20A. The body surface 20A is intended to be worn adjacent to the wearer's body. The garment surface 20B is intended to be placed adjacent to the wearer's undergarments when the sanitary napkin 20 is worn. In the embodiment shown in FIG. 1, "body contacting surface" includes the body surface 20A.
The sanitary napkin 20 has two centerlines, a principal longitudinal centerline L and a principal transverse centerline T. The term "longitudinal", as used herein, refers to a line, axis or direction in the plane of the sanitary napkin 20 that is generally aligned with (e.g., approximately parallel to) a vertical plane which bisects a standing wearer into left and right body halves when the sanitary napkin 20 is worn. The terms "transverse" or "lateral" used herein, are interchangeable, and refer to a line, axis or direction which lies within the plane of the sanitary napkin 20 that is generally perpendicular to the longitudinal direction.
FIG. 1 shows that the main body portion 22 of the sanitary napkin 20 comprises the portion of the sanitary napkin without the flaps 24. The main body portion 22 has two spaced apart longitudinal edges 26, two spaced apart transverse or end edges (or "ends") 28, which together form the periphery 30 of the main body portion. The main body portion 22 also has two end regions, which are designated first end region 32 and second end region 34. A central region 36 is disposed between the end regions 32 and 34. The end regions 32 and 34 extend outwardly in the longitudinal direction from the edges of the central region 36 about 1/8 to about 1/3 of the length of the main body portion. A detailed description of the characteristics of a central region and two end regions for a sanitary napkin is contained in U.S. Patent 4,690,680 issued to Higgins on September 1, 1987.
The main body portion 22 of the sanitary napkin 20 can be of any thickness, including relatively thick, intermediate thickness, relatively thin, or even very thin (or "ultra thin"). An "ultra-thin" sanitary napkin 20 as described in U.S. Patents 4,950,264 and 5,009,653 issued to Osborn preferably has a caliper of less than about 3 millimeters.
The embodiment of the sanitary napkin 20 shown in the drawings is intended to be an example of an ultra-thin sanitary napkin. The main body portion 22 of the sanitary napkin 20 may also be relatively flexible, so that it is comfortable for the wearer.
It should, however, be understood that the sanitary napkin shown is merely one embodiment, and that the present invention is not limited to absorbent articles of the type or having the specific configurations shown in the drawings.
WO 00/69484 cA o23~302~ 2ooi-ii-o2 pCT/US00/13842 FIG. 2 shows the individual components of the main body portion 22 of the sanitary napkin 20. The main body portion 22 of the sanitary napkin 20 preferably comprises at least three primary components. These include a liquid pervious topsheet 38, a liquid impervious backsheet 40, and an absorbent core 42 positioned between the topsheet 38 and the backsheet 40. Optionally, the absorbent core 42 may include other components such as an acquisition component 44. The acquisition component 44 may either be a separate component positioned between the topsheet 38 and the absorbent core 42, or it may comprise part of a composite topsheet or part of the absorbent core 42.
A topsheet 38 which is particularly suitable for use in the sanitary napkin 20 comprises an apertured formed film. Apertured formed films are preferred for the topsheet because they are pervious to body exudates and, if properly apertured, have a reduced tendency to allow liquids to pass back through and rewet the wearer's skin. Thus, the surface of the formed film which is in contact with the body remains dry, thereby reducing body soiling and creating a more comfortable feel for the wearer.
Suitable formed films are described in U.S. Patent 3,929,135, entitled "Absorptive Structures Having Tapered Capillaries", which issued to Thompson on December 30, 1975;
U.S.
Patent 4,324,246 entitled "Disposable Absorbent Article Having A Stain Resistant Topsheet", which issued to Mullane, et al. on April 13, 1982; U.S. Patent 4,342,314 entitled "Resilient Plastic Web Exhibiting Fiber-Like Properties", which issued to Radel, et al. on August 3, 1982; U.S. Patent 4,463,045 entitled "Macroscopically Expanded Three-Dimensional Plastic Web Exhibiting Non-Glossy Visi~~~4c; Surface and Cloth-Like Tactile Impression", which issued to Ahr et al. on July 31, 1984; U.S. Patent 4,780,352 entitled "Covering Structure For Absorbent Hygienic Sanitary Products, and an Absorbent Product Having Such A Covering", which issued to Palumbo on October 25, 1988;
U.S.
Patent 5,006,394 "Multilayer Polymeric Film" issued to Baird on April 9, 1991;
and U.S.
Patent Application Serial No. 08/442,935 entitled "Fluid Transport Webs Exhibiting Surface Energy Gradients" filed in the name of Ouellette, et al. on May 31, 1995 (PCT
Publication WO 96/00548, published January 11, 1996).
In a preferred embodiment, the topsheet 38 comprises an apertured formed film made in accordance with U.S. Patents 4,342,314 issued to Radel, et al. and 4,463,045 issued to Ahr, et al., which is marketed on sanitary napkins as the DRI-WEAVE
topsheet by The Procter & Gamble Company of Cincinnati, OH. Such an apertured film is preferably obtained as product No. X-5652 from Tredegar Film Products of Terre Haute, IN. In this preferred embodiment, during manufacture the resin used to form the apertured film is preferably provided with a surfactant incorporated therein.
WO 00/69484 cA o23~302~ 2ooi-ii-o2 PCT/US00/13842 In preferred embodiments of the present invention, the body surface of the topsheet 38 is hydrophilic so that liquids will be transferred through the topsheet more readily. If the topsheet is made of a hydrophobic material, at least the upper surface of the topsheet is treated to be hydrophilic so that liquids will transfer through the topsheet more rapidly.
This diminishes the likelihood that menstrual fluid will flow off the topsheet rather than flowing into and being absorbed by the absorbent core. The body surface of the topsheet 38 can be made hydrophilic by treating it with a surfactant. Suitable methods of treating a topsheet with a surfactant are described in U.S. Patent 4,950,254 issued to Osborn; U.S.
Patents 4,988,344 entitled "Absorbent Articles with Multiple Layer Absorbent Layers"
issued to Reising, et al on January 29, 1991; and U.S. Patent 4,988,345 entitled "Absorbent Articles with Rapid Acquiring Absorbent Cores" issued to Reising on January 29, 1991.
A backsheet 40 which is particularly suitable for use in the sanitary napkin comprises a polyethylene film having a thickness of from about 0.012 mm (0.5 mil) to about 0.051 mm (2.0 mils) as stated above. A suitable backsheet material is obtained as product No. 18-1401 from the Clopay Corporation of Cincinnati, Ohio. A
suitable breathable backsheet material is a laminate of an apertured film such as that described in U.S. Patent 3,929,135 issued to Thompson which is inverted so that the smaller openings of the tapered capillaries face the absorbent core 42 which is adhesively laminated to a microporous film such as that described in Exxon's U.S. Patent 4,777,073.
An absorbent core 42 which is particularly suitable for use in the sanitary napkin 20 comprises a mufti-bonded air laid nonwoven material. In this preferred embodiment, this mufti-bonded air laid nonwoven material comprises about 52% cellulose fibers, about 20% bi-component fibers, about 25% superabsorbent hydrogel-forming material (or absorbent gelling material) particles, and about 3% latex binder. The absorbent core 42 preferably has a basis weight of about 125 g/yd2 (about 1 SO g/m2), including the particles of absorbent gelling material. Preferably, this mufti-bonded air laid nonwoven absorbent core 42 is formed by depositing three streams of cellulose and bi-component fibers, with absorbent gelling material particles 58 laid down with the last stream of fibers to form the bottom portion of the absorbent core. While the absorbent core 42 is shown as a laminate in FIGS. 2 and 3, in preferred embodiments, the fibers are blended together to form a single web. Such a mufti-bonded air laid nonwoven material is preferably obtained in roll form as product 915000X313 from Merfin Hygienic Products.
WO 00/69484 cA o23~302~ 2ooi-ii-o2 PCT/C1S00/13842 In alternative embodiments, the mufti-bonded air laid nonwoven material used for the absorbent core can be bonded using some material other than latex (such as starch or PVA, for example). In another alternative embodiment, the absorbent core can be formed as a laminate that preferably also has a basis weight of about 150 g/m2 and comprises two (or more) layers of mufti-bonded air laid nonwoven material with the particles of absorbent gelling material therebetween. Suitable laminate absorbent core structures are described generally in U.S. Patents 4,950,264 and 5,009,653 issued to Osborn, U.S.
Patent 5,460,623 issued to Emenaker, et al. Another suitable absorbent core is described in U.S. Patent Application Serial No. 08/122,114, entitled "Sanitary Napkin Having Core Predisposed To A Convex Upward Configuration", filed in the name of Hines, et al. on September 16, 1993 (PCT Publication No. WO 95/07674, published March 23, 1995).
In the case of thicker sanitary napkins, the absorbent core 42 is preferably comprised of airfelt. Suitable absorbent cores for thicker sanitary napkins are described in U.S. Patent 5,234,422 issued to Sneller, et al. In a preferred embodiment, the topsheet 38, acquisition component 44, and absorbent core 42 can be provided with embossed channels as shown in the Sneller, et al. patent. If such embossed channels are used, they preferably lie laterally outside of the longitudinally-oriented concave lines 56A defining the sides of the unbonded window 54.
The absorbent core 42 optionally includes an acquisition component 44. The acquisition component 44 can be made from any materials suitable. The acquisition component 44 may, for example, be comprised of woven or nonwoven materials.
The fibers or other components of these materials may be synthetic, or partially synthetic and partially natural. Suitable synthetic fibers include polyester, polypropylene, polyethylene, nylon, viscous rayon, or cellulose acetate fibers. Suitable natural fibers include cotton, cellulose, or other natural fibers. The acquisition component 44 may also be at least partially comprised of cross-linked cellulose fibers. The acquisition component 44, if nonwoven, can be made by a number of different processes. These include, but are not limited to: air laid, wet laid, meltblown, spunbonded, carded, thermally bonded, air through bonded, powder bonded, latex bonded, solvent bonded, spunlaced, and combinations of the foregoing.
An acquisition component 44 which is particularly suitable for use in the sanitary napkin 20 comprises a laminate of two nonwoven materials. The uppermost layer preferably comprises an 19 g/yd2 (22.5 g/m2) spunbonded polypropylene nonwoven material referred to as product No. 065MLPV60U (or "P-9") obtained from Fiberweb, WO 00/69484 cA o23~302~ 2ooi-m-o2 PCT/US00/13842 North America of Washougal, WA. The underlying layer preferably comprises a multi-bonded air laid nonwoven material that is thermally bonded using powder bonding and latex bonding. 1n a preferred embodiment, this multi-bonded air laid nonwoven material comprises about 77% cellulose fibers, about 20% powder binder, and about 3%
latex 5 binder (1.5% sprayed on each side of the web) and has a basis weight of about 50 g/yd2 (about 60 g/m2). Such a mufti-bonded air laid nonwoven is preferably obtained as product No. 90830X312 from Merfin Hygienic Products, Ltd. of Delta, British Columbia, Canada. These two nonwoven layers are preferably laminated together by depositing the mufti-bonded air laid nonwoven material on the spunbonded polypropylene nonwoven 10 material. The spunbonded material is used as a process aid or carrier web in the process of forming this laminate.
In alternative embodiments, the spunbonded polypropylene nonwoven material may have a greater or a lower basis weight, or it may be replaced by an air laid tissue, a wet laid tissue, or any of the materials described above. If a wet laid tissue is used instead of a 15 polypropylene nonwoven material, the orientation of the laminate is preferably reversed so that in the finished product, the mufti-bonded air laid nonwoven material lies above the wet laid tissue layer. In the case of thicker sanitary napkins, any of the acquisition components described above can be used. Additionally, in one preferred thicker sanitary napkin embodiment, a low density latex bonded air laid material can be used as the entire acquisition component (that is, no tertiary topsheet is required). A low density latex bonded air laid material suitable for this purpose is a material having a basis weight of about 80 g/m2 known as product No. FG413MHB, which is obtained from Walkisoft, USA of Mt. Holly, NC.
The topsheet 38, the backsheet 40, and the absorbent core 42 may be assembled in a variety of configurations known in the art (including layered or "sandwich"
configurations and wrapped or "tube" configurations). FIGS. 1-3 show a preferred embodiment of the sanitary napkin 20 assembled in a sandwich construction. In FIGS. 1-3, the topsheet 38 and the backsheet 40 have length and width dimensions generally larger than those of the absorbent core 42. The topsheet 38 and the backsheet 40 extend beyond the edges of the absorbent core 42 to form portions of the periphery 30. In the embodiment shown in FIGS. 2 and 3 having the acquisition component 44, the garment-facing side of the topsheet 38 is preferably joined to the body-facing side of the absorbent core (i.e., the body-facing side of the acquisition component 44). If the absorbent core 42 has a layered structure, each layer may be joined each other, if desired. The acquisition component 44 may be joined to the absorbent core 42, if desired. If these components are joined, they WO 00/69484 cA o23~302~ 2ooi-m-o2 PCT/US00/13842 can be joined in any of the manners described hereinabove. The backsheet 40 is preferably joined to the garment-facing side of the absorbent core 42 by adhesives.
The portions of the topsheet 38 and backsheet 40 that extend beyond the edges of the absorbent core 42 are preferably also joined to each other. Preferably, in the embodiment shown, these portions of the topsheet 38 and backsheet 40 are joined using adhesives over substantially the entire portions that extend beyond the edges of the absorbent core 42 and a crimp seal at the end edges 28 of the main body portion 22 where the topsheet 38 and backsheet 40 are densified by the application of pressure or heat and pressure.
The sanitary napkin 20 shown in FIGS. 1-3, as discussed above, comprises an optional pair of flaps 24 that are joined to the main body portion 22. The flaps 24 extend laterally outward beyond the longitudinal side edges 26 of the main body portion 22 from their proximal edges 60 to their distal edges (or "free end") 62. The flaps 24 extend outward from at least the central region 36 of the main body portion 22.
The flaps 24 can be joined to the main body portion 22 in any suitable manner.
Preferably, in the embodiment shown in FIGS. 1-3, the flaps 24 are integral with the main body portion 22 (that is, the flaps 24 comprise integral extensions of the topsheet 38 and backsheet 40). In other alternative embodiments, the flaps 24 can comprise separate components that are joined to the main body portion 22. The flaps 24 are each joined to (or associated with) main body portion 22 along a junctr.av. This is typically a longitudinally-oriented (or "longitudinal") juncture, such as lines of juncture 68. As used herein, the terms "juncture" (or "line of juncture") refer to regions where the flaps 24 extend from or are joined to the main body portion 22. The line of juncture 68 in the embodiment illustrated in the drawings can be considered to be defined by concave inwardly-oriented regions or lines. When the sanitary napkin 20 is worn by the wearer, the flaps 24 are folded under the wearer's undergarment. The flaps 24 are typically folded along or adjacent the proximal edges 60. If the width of crotch of wearer's undergarment is narrower than that of the main body portion 22, the flaps 24 may be folded along a longitudinal portion of the main body portion 22 inside the proximal edge 60.
If the width of crotch of wearer's undergarment is wider than that of the main body portion 22, the flaps 24 may be folded along a hinge 70 of the main body portion 22 which is described below.
The flaps 24 can be in any suitable configuration. Suitable flaps are described in Reexamined Patent No. B1 4,589,876 entitled "Sanitary Napkin", issued to Van Tilburg, WO 00/69484 cA o23~302~ 2ooi-ii-o2 pCT/US00/13842 Certificate of Reexamination issued April 27, 1993; U.S. Patent 4,687,478 entitled °'Shaped Sanitary Napkin With Flaps", which issued to Van Tilburg on August 18, 1987;
U.S. Patent 5,389,094 entitled "Absorbent Article Having Flaps and Zones of Differential Extensibility" issued to Lavash, et al. on February 14, 1995; U.S. Patent 5,558,663 entitled "Absorbent Article Having Undergarment Covering Components With Zones of Extensibility" issued to Weinberger, et al. on September 24, 1996 (which describes an alternative to flaps that are applied by the wearer); and in International Patent Application Serial No. PCT US 96/15957 entitled "Absorbent Article Having Flaps With Step Configuration and Zones of Extensibility" filed on October 3, 1996, in the name of Lash, et al.
The garment surface 20B of the sanitary napkin 20 may include, and preferably does include, fasteners for attaching the sanitary napkin to the wearer's undergarment.
FIG. 2 shows the central pad fastener 82 which is adapted to secure the main body portion 22 of the sanitary napkin to the crotch region of an undergarment. Any types of fasteners known in the art, such as adhesive fasteners and mechanical fasteners can be used.
Fasteners comprising adhesives have been found to work well for this purpose, with pressure-sensitive adhesives being preferred. In a preferred embodiment, the central pad fastener 82 comprises a pair of spaced apart longitudinally-oriented strips or zones of adhesive that are centered about the longitudinal centerline L.
The outer surface of the flaps 24, adjacent the distal edges 62 of the flaps, is preferably provided with a flap adhesive 84. The flap adhesive 84 is used to assist in maintaining the flaps 24 in position after they are wrapped around the edge of the crotch portion of the panty. Suitable adhesive fasteners are described in greater detail in U.S.
Patent 4,917,697. The flaps 24 can be maintained in position by attaching the flaps 24 to the undergarment, or to the opposing flap.
The fasteners are not limited to adhesive attachment means. Any type of fastener used in the art can be used for such purpose. For example, the sanitary napkin 20 could be secured to the wearer's undergarment by mechanical fasteners, such as VELCRO, or the fasteners described in U.S. Patent 4,946,527 entitled "Pressure-Sensitive Adhesive Fastener and Method of Making the Same" issued to Battrell on August 7, 1990, or U.S.
Patent 5,392,498 entitled "Non-Abrasive Skin Friendly Mechanical Fastening System"
issued to Goulait, et al. on February 28, 1995. For simplicity, however, the fasteners will be described in terms of adhesive attachment means.
WO 00/69484 cA o23~302~ 2ooi-m-o2 pCT/US00/13842 The adhesive attachment means are respectively covered by removable release liners, central pad release liner and flap release liner, both designated 86.
The pressure-sensitive adhesives should be covered with release liners 86 to keep the adhesives from sticking to extraneous surfaces prior to use. Suitable release liners are described in U.S.
Patent 4,917,697. A particularly preferred release liner which also serves as an individual package for wrapping the sanitary napkin is described in U.S. Patent 4,556,146 issued to Swanson, et al.
The sanitary napkin 20 shown in FIGS. 1-3 may have a deformed region that forms a hinge 70 between the main body portion 22 and at least a portion of the flaps 24.
The sanitary napkin 20 preferably also has at least one zone of extensibility (or "zone of differential extensibility") 72 for relieving the stresses on the flaps 24 when they are folded around a panty crotch. These are described in PCT publication WO
published on April 10, 1997 titled "Absorbent Article Having Flaps With A
Deformed Hinge And Zones Of Extensibility" which is incorporated herein by reference.
Skin care compositions are applied to at least a portion of the body contacting surface of the sanitary napkin 20. The skin care composition may be applied to any portion of the body contacting surface of the sanitary napkin 20. If desired, the skin care composition may be applied to a portion of the garment surface of the sanitary napkin 20.
In the embodiment shown in FIG. 1, the skin care composition is preferably applied to the entirety of the topsheet 38 of the main body portion 22. The skin care composition is also preferably applied to the entire area of the integral topsheet 38 of the flaps 24.
Alternatively, the skin care composition may be applied to only a portion of the topsheet 38 of the main body portion 22 and/or a portion of the integral topsheet 38 of the flaps 24.
For example, the skin care composition may not be applied to the area of the flaps 24 which is not expected to contact the wearer's skin in a normal use condition of the sanitary napkin 20 (e.g., the distal area 91 of the flap 24 which is adjacent to the distal edge 62 (refer to FIG. 4)). However, if the skin care composition is applied to a portion of the sanitary napkin selectively, it is preferable that the skin care composition is applied to the flap folding area 90 where the flaps 24 are expected to be folded. The skin care composition applied to the flap folding area 90 of the sanitary napkin 20 reduces the wearer's discomfort such as itch and/or abrasion due to rubbing of the flap folding area 90 of the sanitary napkin 20 against the wearer's skin. If the skin care composition is applied to a portion of the sanitary napkin selectively, it is also preferable that the skin care composition is applied to longitudinal end areas 92 and 94 of the sanitary napkin 20. The skin care composition applied to the front end area 92 of the sanitary napkin 20 tends to WO 00/69484 cA o23~302~ 2ooi-ii-o2 pCT/US00/13842 reduce itch at the front region of the sanitary napkin 20 (which corresponds to the portion of the wearer's body around pubic hairs). The skin care composition applied to the back end area 94 of the sanitary napkin 20 tends to reduce adherence of the sanitary napkin to the wearer's skin at the back region of the sanitary napkin 20 (which corresponds to the portion of the wearer's body around anus). It is also preferable that the skin care composition is applied to central area 96 of the sanitary napkin 20. The skin care composition applied to the central area 96 of the sanitary napkin 20 tends to reduce adherence of the sanitary napkin to the wearer's skin at the central region of the sanitary napkin 20 (which corresponds to the portion of the wearer's body around vulva). In another embodiment, if the sanitary napkin 20 has cuffs along the longitudinal side edges 26, the surface of the cuffs may be treated with the skin care composition.
Numerous other embodiments of the sanitary napkin 20 are possible. For example, the main body portion of the sanitary napkin can be provided in the form of a compound sanitary napkin that has its components bonded as described herein for improved integrity and acquisition. General descriptions of compound sanitary napkins are found in P&G's U.S. Patent 4,425,130 entitled "Compound Sanitary Napkin" issued to DesMarais, et al.
on January 10, 1984, and in Statutory Invention Registration H1614 entitled "Body Fitting Compound Sanitary Napkin", published in the name of Mayer, et al. on November 5, 1996. To form the compound sanitary napkin, a sanitary napkin such as that described herein can serve as the panty protector (or "base pad") and a tube of absorbent material wrapped by a topsheet (or "primary menstrual pad") can be placed on top of the sanitary napkin and attached thereto at the ends. The fusion bonding on the base pad is preferably distributed in the same manner as shown on the drawings herein. The attachment of the tube to the sanitary napkin is preferably achieved by fusion bonding extensions of the topsheet material at the ends of the tube to the base pad. In some preferred embodiments of such a compound sanitary napkin, there may also be attachment between the ends of the tube of absorbent material and the base pad. The tube of the compound sanitary napkin can be attached to the base pad between its ends by any suitable attachment means, such as by adhesives.
The skin care composition may be applied to the body contacting surface of other types of absorbent articles. Such absorbent articles having a body contacting surface include, but not limited to, tampons, interlabial absorbent articles, panti-liners, incontinence articles, diapers including infant diapers, training pants, adult incontinence diapers, etc.
WO 00/69484 cA o23~302~ 2ooi-m-o2 PCT/US00/13842 Herein "tampon" refers to any type of absorbent structure which is inserted into the vaginal canal or other body cavities for the absorption of fluid therefrom. The basic tampon structures are described in U.S. Patents 1,926,900 issued to Haas on September 12, 1933; U.S. Patent 1,946,911 issued to Haas on July 3, 1934; and U.S.
Patent 3,322,123 issued to Giswold, et al. on May 30, 1967.
Herein "interlabial absorbent article" refers to an absorbent device that is insertable into the interlabial space of a female wearer for catamenial purposes, incontinence protection, or both. Suitable interlabial absorbent articles are disclosed in, e.g., U.S. Patent 5,762,644 entitled "Toilet-Disposable Absorbent Interlabial Device"
10 issued to Osborn, et al. on June 9, 1998; PCT Publication No. WO 98/29078 entitled "Thin Comfortable Interlabial Absorbent Structure" published in the name of Osborn, et al. on July 9, 1998; U.S. Patent Des. 404,814 entitled "Interlabial Absorbent Device"
issued to Mayer on January 26, 1999; U. S. Application Serial No. 09/071,425, filed on May 1, 1998 in the name of Brown, et al.
15 The terms "panty liner" or "panti-liner" refer to absorbent articles that are less bulky than sanitary napkins which are generally worn by women between their menstrual periods. Suitable absorbent articles are disclosed in, e.g., U.S. Pat. No.
4,738,676 entitled "Pantiliner" issued to Osborn on Apr. 19, 1988.
Herein "incontinence article" refers to pads, undergarments (pads held in place by 20 a suspension system of same type, such as a belt, or the la?;;~::r~, inserts for absorbent articles, capacity boosters for absorbent articles, briefs, bed pads, and the like regardless of whether they are worn by adults or other incontinent persons. Suitable incontinence articles are disclosed in, e.g., U.S. Patent No. 4,253,461 issued to Strickland, et al. on March 3, 1981; U.S. Patent Nos. 4,597,760 and 4,597,761 issued to Buell; the above-mentioned U.S. Patent No. 4,704,115; U.S. Patent No. 4,909,802 issued to Ahr, et al.;
U.S. Patent No. 4,964,860 issued to Gipson, et al. on October 23, 1990; and in U.S. Patent Application Serial No. 07/637,090 filed by Noel, et al. on January 3, 1991 (PCT
Publication No. WO 92/11830 published on July 23, 1992).
Herein "diaper" refers to an absorbent article generally worn by infants, and incontinent persons that is worn about the lower torso of the wearer. Suitable diapers are disclosed in, e.g., U.S. Patent 3,860,003 issued to Buell on January 14, 1975;
U.S. Patent 5,151,092 issued to Buell et al. on September 29, 1992; U.S. Patent 5,221,274 issued to Buell et al. on June 22, 1993; and U.S. Patent 5,554,145 issued to Roe et al.
on September 10, 1996.
WO 00/69484 cA o23~302~ 2ooi-ii-o2 pCT/US00/13842 Herein "training pants" refers to disposable garments having fixed sides and leg openings. Training pants are placed in position on the wearer by inserting the wearer's legs into the leg openings and sliding the training pant into position about the wearer's lower torso. Suitable training pants are disclosed in, e.g., U.S. Patent No.
5,246,433, issued to Hasse, et al. on September 21, 1993.
The skin care composition may be applied to a portion of or the entirety of the body contacting surface of absorbent articles. For example, the skin care composition may be applied on a portion of or the entirety of the topsheet of the absorbent articles. If the absorbent article has other portions which contact the wearer's skin such as cuffs, the skin care composition may be applied on a portion of or the entirety of those portions.
Herein "cuff' includes leg cuffs including barrier cuffs, gasketing cuffs, combinations and variations thereof; transverse barriers and pockets/spacers; side panels; as well as waist cuffs including waist flaps, waistbands, waistcaps, and unitary waistcap/waistbands; and combinations of all or some of these cuffs.
Representative topsheets treated with a skin care composition are described in, e.g., U.S. Patent 5,643,588, "Diaper Having a Lotioned Topsheet", issued to Roe, Bakes & Warner on July 1, 1997; and U.S. Patent 5,635,191, "Diaper Having a Lotioned Topsheet Containing a Polysiloxane Emollient", issued to Roe & Mackey on June 3, 1997; U.S. Patent 5,609,587, "Diaper Having a Lotioned Topsheet Comprising a Liquid Polyol Polyester Emollient and an Immobilizing Agent", issued to Roe on March 11, 1997; and U.S. Patent 5,607,760, "Disposable Absorbent Article Having a Lotioned Topsheet Containing an Emollient and a Polyol Polyester Immobilizing Agent", issued to Roe, on March 4, 1997; each of which are incorporated herein by reference.
Methods for delivering a skin care composition via the repeated use of absorbent articles having such treated topsheets are disclosed in U.S. Patent Application Serial No.
08/926,532 "A
Method For Maintaining or Improving Skin Health", Elder, et al., filed on September 10, 1997; U.S. Patent Application Serial No. 08/926,533 "A Method For Improving Skin Condition", Van Rijswijck, et al. filed on September 10, 1997; and U.S. Patent Application Serial No. 08/908,852 "Diaper Having A Lotioned Topsheet", Roe, et al. filed on August 8, 1997; each of which is incorporated herein by reference.
Representative cuffs treated with a skin care composition are described in, e.g., U.S. Patent Application Serial No. 08/766,386 "Absorbent Articles Having Lotioned Leg Cuffs", Schulte et al, filed on December 3, 1996; U.S. Patent Application Serial No. 08/840,039 "Absorbent Articles Having Lotioned Leg Cuffs Containing a Polysiloxane Emollient", Schulte et al, filed on April 24, 1997; U.S. Patent Application Serial No. 08/962,310 "Absorbent WO 00/69484 cA o23~302~ 2ooi-m-o2 PCT/US00/13842 Article Having cuffs and Topsheet with Skin Care Composition Disposed Thereon", Schulte et al, filed on October 31, 1997; U.S. Patent Application Serial No.
08/962,312 "Absorbent Article Having cuffs and Topsheet with Skin Care Compositions) Disposed Thereon", Vanri et al, filed on October 31, 1997; each of which is incorporated herein by reference. Representative interlabial absorbent articles treated with a skin care composition are disclosed in, e.g., U.S. Patent Application Serial No.
08/869,897 "Emollient-Treated Absorbent Interlabial Device", Osborn et al, filed on June 5, 1997;
U.S. Patent Application Serial No. 08/869,700 "Absorbent Interlabial Device Treated With A Polysiloxane Emollient", Osborn et al, filed on June 5, 1997; each of which is incorporated herein by reference. Representative absorbent articles having breathability treated with a skin care composition are disclosed in, e.g., U.S. Patent Application Serial No. 08/926,566 "Disposable Absorbent Articles Providing a Skin Condition Benefit", ELDER et al., filed on 09/10/97.
B. Skin Care Composition.
While the specific skin care compositions) delivered (referred to herein as "skin care composition" and "composition") in accordance with the present invention is an important factor in delivering desirable skin effects, it is preferred that the skin care composition should provide a protective, nonocclusive function (e.g., a relatively liquid impervious but vapor pervious barrier) to avoid skin hyperhydration and skin exposure to materials contained in body exudates; an abrasion minimizing function to reduce skin irritation in the areas where the body contacting surface of absorbent articles contact the wearer's skin; or contain agents that deliver, either directly or indirectly, skin care benefits. For example, indirect benefits include improved removal of skin irntants such as menses, feces or urine. The composition may be in a variety of forms, including, but not limited to, emulsions, lotions, creams, ointments, salves, powders, suspensions, encapsulations, gels, and the like.
The skin care compositions are solid or semisolid at 20°C and are solid or semisolid at 40°C. Herein, "semisolid" means the skin care composition has a viscoelastic property (i.e., when no shear stress is applied, the skin care composition has the appearance of a solid. However, as shear stress is increased, the skin care composition can be made to flow as a fluid.) This property ensures the stability of the skin care composition under static conditions (e.g., under condition where the product is in storage and/or transportation) and maximize the availability of the skin care composition transferred to the skin for the skin effects under mechanical shear (e.g., under WO 00/69484 cA o23~302~ 2ooi-ii-o2 pCT/US00/13842 condition where the product is worn by the wearer and shear stress is applied to the skin care composition).
The skin care composition has viscosity of more than about 105 Poise under shear stress of less than about 3X104 dynes/cm2, and viscosity of less than about 102 Poise under shear stress of more than about 106 dynes/cm2, at 40°C.
Preferably, the skin care composition has viscosity of more than about 106 Poise under shear stress of less than about 3X104 dynes/cm2, and viscosity of less than about 101 Poise under shear stress of more than about 106 dynes/cm2, at 40°C. Herein, 40°C represents the temperature which the skin care composition potentially experiences while the article is in storage or transported or worn in contact with the skin. Shear stress of about 3X104 dynes/cm2 represents the maximum shear stress applied to the skin care composition while the article is in storage or transported. Shear stress of about 106 dynes/cm2 represents the shear stress applied to the skin care composition at least once while the article is worn.
Viscosity of about 105 Poise is the lowermost viscosity required for preventing the skin care composition from migrating in storage or transportation. Viscosity of more than about 106 Poise is more preferable to prevent the skin care composition from migrating.
Viscosity of about 102 Poise is the uppermost viscosity required for obtaining the effective lubrication between the wearer's skin and the body contacting surface of the article and transfer of the skin care composition onto the wearer's skin.
Viscosity of less than about 10' Poise is more preferable for effective lubrication and transfer of the skin care composition. Viscosity at various shear stress should be measured by available Rheometers such as cone to plate or plate to plate type Rheometers (e.g.
Rheometer SR-2000, Rheometrics Inc.), at 40°C.
FIG. 5 shows a graph of shear stress vs. viscosity of one example of preferred skin care composition. When the skin care composition has viscosity of more than, about 105 Poise under shear stress of about less than 3X104 dynes/cm2 at 40°C, the skin care composition has less tendency to migrate into the interior of the article in storage or transportation and has more tendency to remain on the body contacting surface of the article. When the skin care composition has viscosity of less than about 102 Poise under shear stress of more than about 106 dynes/cm2 at 40°C, the skin care composition has more tendency to transfer to the wearer's skin. Thus, the skin care composition tends to remain stable on the body contacting surface of the article in storage or transportation, thereby requiring less initial amount of skin care composition disposed on the body contacting surface. Once the absorbent article is worn by the wearer, the skin care composition is exposed to higher shear stress than the shear stress in storage or WO 00/69484 cA o23~302~ 2ooi-ii-o2 pCT/US00/13842 transportation. Thereby, the skin care composition starts to flow and effective amount of the skin care composition is transferred to the wearer's skin. Herein, the term "effective amount of a skin care composition" refers to an amount of a particular composition which, when applied or migrated to ("disposed on") the body contacting surface, will be effective in delivering desirable skin effects mentioned above.
The skin care compositions also have consistency of not more than about 300, preferably of not more than about 150, more preferably of not more than about 100, at 40°C. Herein "consistency" means resistance against deformation of skin care composition. When the skin care composition has consistency of not more than about 300 at 40°C, the skin care composition has more tendency to remain on the body contacting surface of the absorbent article. Consistency can be measured by Penetrometer described in ASTM D5, at 40°C. The Penetrometer which is used for measuring consistency is supplied by Petrolab Company, 874 Albany-Shaker Road, Latham, NY, under the designation of PNR-10.
The effective amount of composition disposed on the body contacting surface will depend, to a large extent, on the particular skin care composition used, a portion of the body contacting surface where the skin care composition is applied, and/or a product form (e.g., diaper, sanitary napkin, etc.). Nonetheless, the minimum quantity of the skin care composition disposed on at least a portion of the body contacting surface of absorbent articles will preferably be not less than about 0.05 mg/in2 (0.0078 mg/cm2), more preferably not less than about 0.1 mg/in2 (0.016 mg/cm2), st~l1 more preferably not less than about 0.5 mg/in2 (0.078 mg/cm2). The maximum quantity of the skin care composition disposed on at least a portion of the body contacting surface will preferably be not more than about 80 mg/in2 (12 mg/cm2), more preferably not more than about 25 mg/in2 (3.9 mg/cm2), still more preferably not more than about 5 mg/in2 (0.8 mg/cm2).
These ranges are by way of illustration only and the skilled artisan will recognize that the nature of the composition will dictate the level that must be disposed thereon to achieve the desired skin effects, and that such levels are ascertainable by routine experimentation in light of the present disclosure. Particularly when the skin care composition such as that described in Example 1 is applied to the body contacting surface (i.e., the topsheet 38 of the main body portion 22 and the flap 24) of the sanitary napkin shown in FIG.
1, the quantity of the skin care composition disposed on the body contacting surface preferably ranges from about 0.05 mg/in2 (0.0078 mg/cm2) to about 25 mg/in2 (3.9 mg/cm2), more preferably from about 0.1 mg/in2 (0.016 mg/cm2) to about 10 mg/in2 (1.5 mg/cm2), still more preferably from about 0.5 mg/in2 (0.078 mg/cm2) to about 4 mg/in2 (0.6 mg/cm2).
WO 00/69484 cA o23~302~ 2ooi-m-o2 PCT/US00/13842 The skin care compositions may comprise: (1) one or more emollients) (2) one or more immobilizing agents) to stabilize the emollients) (3) one or more skin care active ingredient(s), and (4) other optional components. Although the kind, grade and content of each component of the skin care compositions are arbitrary, the skin care composition 5 including at least one skin care active ingredient satisfies viscosity of more than about 105 Poise under shear stress of less than about 3X104 dynes/cm2, and viscosity of less than about 102 Poise under shear stress of more than about 106 dynes/cm2, at 40°C.
Especially, when the skin care composition comprises emollients and immobilizing agents, the selected ranges of quantity of emollients and immobilizing agents help to 10 achieve the above viscosity range. Namely, the skin care composition comprises from about 40 to about 90% of the emollient. Preferably, the skin care composition comprises from about 50 to about 85%, more preferably from about 60 to about 80%, of the emollient. The skin care composition comprises from about 10 to about 60% of the immobilizing agent. Preferably, the skin care composition comprises from about 1 S to 15 about 50%, more preferably from about 20 to about 40%, of the immobilizing agent.
1. Emollient One key component of the skin care composition is one or more emollient(s).
The emollients are selected from materials that soften, smoothen, coat, moisturize, lubricate or cleanses the skin. In general, an emollient simultaneously accomplishes several of these 20 objectives such as smoothing, moisturizing and lubricating the skin. The emollient preferably has a viscoelastic consistency at 20°C. However, this is not essential as long as the skin care composition such as the combination of the emollients and the other components (e.g., immobilizing agents) satisfies the viscosity described above.
The emollients are also substantially free of water. Herein, substantially free of 25 water means that water is not intentionally added to the emollients.
Addition of water to the emollients is not needed in preparing or using the skin care compositions.
However, minor and or trace quantities of water in the emollient that are contained as the results of ambient humidity can be tolerated without adverse effect. Typically, the emollients contain about 5% or less water, preferably about 1% or less water, most preferably about 0.5% or less water.
The emollients are preferably hydrophobic such that the sweat, feces, and/or the menses form larger contact angle against the emollient than against the skin and or the topsheet of the article. The hydrophobic emollient reduces wetting of the sweat, feces WO 00/69484 cA o23~302~ 2ooi-ii-o2 PCT/US00/13842 and/or the menses against the skin and or the topsheet of the article, thereby reducing sticky feeling on the wearer's skin.
The emollients include petroleum-based, fatty acid ester type, alkyl ethoxylate type, fatty acid ester ethoxylates, fatty alcohol type, polysiloxane type, or mixtures of them.
Petroleum-based emollients include petrolatum. Petrolatum is a mixture of aliphatic hydrocarbons having alkyl chain length of 16 or more and possesses inherently a jelly appearance and a jelly hand. Petrolatum is also sometimes categorized as a mixture of mineral oil and microcrystalline wax. Herein, mineral oil refers to a fraction of petrolatum having less viscous mixtures of hydrocarbons having alkyl chain length of from 16 to 24. Herein, microcrystalline wax refers to a fraction of petrolatum having more viscous mixtures of hydrocarbons having alkyl chain length of 25 or more.
Petrolatum as the emollient provides the smoothness of the skin because of its jelly hand.
Also, petrolatum as the emollient coats the skin or can be absorbed by skin, thereby resulting in moisturizing the skin.
Petrolatum contains heavy aliphatic hydrocarbons and light aliphatic hydrocarbons. The heavy aliphatic hydrocarbons and the light aliphatic hydrocarbons can be defined by alkyl chain length of alkanes in petrolatum including both normal chain and isomers. The light aliphatic hydrocarbons of petrolatum tends to migrate faster than the heavy aliphatic hydrocarbons of petrolatum because molecular weight and diameter of molecules determine the flow property (i.e., viscosity) and diffusion rate of aliphatic hydrocarbons. Therefore, it is preferable that the heavy aliphatic hydrocarbons presents more than the light aliphatic hydrocarbons in petrolatum. The amount of the heavy aliphatic hydrocarbons and the light aliphatic hydrocarbons is comparable by weight ((weight = (the number of the molecules) x (molecular weight of the molecules)).
Reduction of the light aliphatic hydrocarbons contributes to reduce migration of petrolatum. However, too much heavy aliphatic hydrocarbons may render the skin care composition too hard to flow. Therefore, the balance between the amount of the heavy aliphatic hydrocarbons and the amount of the light aliphatic hydrocarbons should be made. Petrolatum preferably has the heavy aliphatic hydrocarbons having alkyl chain length of from 33-36 more than the light aliphatic hydrocarbons having alkyl chain length of from 23-26. In this case, the ratio of the heavy aliphatic hydrocarbons to the light aliphatic hydrocarbons is preferably between 2.0 : 1.0 and 1.0 : 1.0, more preferably between 1.5 : 1.0 and 1.0 : 1Ø More preferably, petrolatum has the heavy aliphatic WO 00/69484 cA o23~302~ 2ooi-m-o2 PCT/US00/13842 hydrocarbons having alkyl chain length of from 30-36 more than the light aliphatic hydrocarbons having alkyl chain length of from 20-26. In this case, the ratio of the heavy aliphatic hydrocarbons to the light aliphatic hydrocarbons is preferably between 2.5 : 1.0 and 1.0 : 1.0, more preferably between 2.0 : 1.0 and 1.0 : 1Ø Yet preferably, petrolatum has the heavy aliphatic hydrocarbons having alkyl chain length of from 27-36 more than the light aliphatic hydrocarbons having alkyl chain length of from 17-26. In this case, the ratio of the heavy aliphatic hydrocarbons to the light aliphatic hydrocarbons is preferably between 3.5 : 1.0 and 1.5 : 1.0, more preferably between 3.0 : 1.0 and 2.0 :
1Ø
Suitable fatty acid esters include those derived from C12-C2g fatty acids, preferably C16-C24 saturated fatty acids, and short chain (C1-Cg, preferably C1-C3) monohydric alcohols. Representative examples of such esters include methyl palmitate, methyl stearate, isopropyl laurate, isopropyl myristate, isopropyl palmitate, ethylhexyl palmitate and mixtures thereof. Suitable fatty acid esters can also be derived from esters of longer chain fatty alcohols (C12-C2g, preferably C12-C16) and shorter chain fatty acids e.g. lactic acid such as lauryl lactate and cetyl lactate. Fatty acid esters as the emollients provide the smoothness of the skin. Also, fatty acid esters as the emollients coat the skin, thereby resulting in moisturizing the skin.
Suitable alkyl ethoxylates include C12-C22 fatty alcohol ethoxylates having an average degree of ethoxylation of from about 2 to about 30. Preferably, the fatty alcohol ethoxylate is selected from the group consisting of lauryl, cetyl, and stearyl ethoxylates, and mixtures thereof, having an average degree of ethoxylation ranging from about 2 to about 23. Representative examples of such alkyl ethoxylates include laureth-3 (a lauryl ethoxylate having an average degree of ethoxylation of 3), laureth-23 (a lauryl ethoxylate having an average degree of ethoxylation of 23), ceteth-10 (a cetyl alcohol ethoxylate having an average degree of ethoxylation of 10) and steareth-10 (a stearyl alcohol ethoxylate having an average degree of ethoxylation of 10). These alkyl ethoxylates as the emollients are typically used in combination with petrolatum as the emollient, at a weight ratio of alkyl ethoxylate emollient to petrolatum emollient of from about 1:1 to about 1:5, preferably from about 1:2 to about 1:4.
Suitable fatty alcohols include C12-C24 fatty alcohols, preferably C16-C24 fatty alcohols, most preferable C 1 g-C24 alcohols. Representative examples include cetyl alcohol, stearyl alcohol, behenyl alcohol and mixtures thereof. These fatty alcohols as the emollients are typically used in combination with petrolatum as the emollient, at a weight WO 00/69484 cA o23~302~ 2ooi-ii-o2 pCT/US00/13842 ratio of fatty alcohol emollient to petrolatum emollient of from about 1:1 to about 1:5, preferably from about 1:1 to about 1:2.
Other suitable types of emollients include polysiloxane compounds which sometimes are called silicone compounds or silicone polymer compounds instead.
In general suitable polysiloxane compounds include those having monomeric siloxane units of the following structure:
-Si-O-wherein, R1 and R2, for each independent siloxane monomeric unit can each independently be hydrogen or any alkyl, aryl, alkenyl, alkaryl, arakyl, cycloalkyl, halogenated hydrocarbon, or other radical. Any of such radicals can be substituted or unsubstituted. R1 and R2 radicals of any particular monomeric unit may differ from the corresponding functionalities of the next adjoining monomeric unit.
Additionally, the polysiloxane can be either a straight chain, a branched chain or have a cyclic structure.
The radicals R1 and R2 can additionally independently be other silaceous functionalities such as, but not limited to siloxanes, polysiloxanes, silanes, and polysilanes. The radicals R1 and R2 may contain any of a variety of organic functionalities including, for example, alcohol, carboxylic acid, phenyl, and amine functionalities.
Exemplary alkyl radicals are methyl, ethyl, propyl, butyl, pentyl, hexyl, octyl, decyl, octadecyl, and the like. Exemplary alkenyl radicals are vinyl, allyl, and the like.
Exemplary aryl radicals are phenyl, diphenyl, naphthyl, and the like.
Exemplary alkaryl radicals are toyl, xylyl, ethylphenyl, and the like. Exemplary aralkyl radicals are benzyl, alpha-phenylethyl, beta-phenylethyl, alpha-phenylbutyl, and the like.
Exemplary cycloalkyl radicals are cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, and the like.
Exemplary halogenated hydrocarbon radicals are chloromethyl, bromoethyl, tetrafluorethyl, fluorethyl, trifluorethyl, trifluorotloyl, hexafluoroxylyl, and the like.
Viscosity of polysiloxanes useful may vary as widely as the viscosity of polysiloxanes in general vary, so long as the polysiloxane is flowable or can be made to be flowable for application to the article topsheet. This includes, but is not limited to, viscosity as low as 5 centistokes (at 37°C as measured by a glass viscometer) to about 20,000,000 centistokes. Preferably the polysiloxanes have a viscosity at 37°C ranging WO 00/69484 cA o23~302~ 2ooi-m-o2 pCT/US00/13842 from about 5 to about 5,000 centistokes, more preferably from about 5 to about 2,000 centistokes, most preferably from about 100 to about 1000 centistokes. High viscosity polysiloxanes which themselves are resistant to flowing can be effectively deposited upon the topsheet of the article by such methods as, for example, emulsifying the polysiloxane in surfactant or providing the polysiloxane in solution with the aid of a solvent, such as hexane, listed for exemplary purposes only. Particular methods for applying polysiloxane emollients onto the topsheet of the article are discussed in more detail hereinafter.
Preferred polysiloxanes compounds are disclosed in U.S. Patent 5,059,282 (Ampulski et al), issued October 22, 1991, which is incorporated herein by reference.
Particularly preferred polysiloxane compounds for use as emollients in the skin care compositions include phenyl-functional polymethylsiloxane compounds (e.g., Dow Corning 556 Cosmetic-Grade Fluid: polyphenylmethylsiloxane) and cetyl or stearyl functionalized dimethicones such as Dow 2502 and Dow 2503 polysiloxane fluids, respectively. In addition to such substitution with phenyl-functional or alkyl groups , effective substitution may be made with amino, carboxyl, hydroxyl, ether, polyether, aldehyde, ketone, amide, ester, and thiol groups. Of these effective substituent groups, the family of groups comprising phenyl, amino, alkyl, carboxyl, and hydroxyl groups are more preferred than the others; and phenyl-functional groups are most preferred.
Besides petrolatum emollient, fatty acid ester emollients, fatty acid ester ethoxylate emollients, alkyl ethoxylate emollients, fatty alcohol emollients, and polysiloxane compound emollients, the emollients can include minor amounts (e.g. up to about 10% of the total emollient) of other, conventional emollients. These other, conventional emollients include propylene glycol, glycerine, triethylene glycol, spermaceti or other waxes, fatty acids, and fatty alcohol ethers having from 12 to 28 carbon atoms . in their fatty chain, such as stearic acid, propoxylated fatty alcohols;
glycerides, acetoglycerides, and ethoxylated glycerides of C12-C2g fatty acids; other fatty esters of polyhydroxy alcohols; lanolin and its derivatives. These other emollients should be included in a manner such that the solid or semisolid characteristics of the skin care composition are maintained.
The amount of emollient that can be included in the skin care composition will depend on a variety of factors, including the particular emollient involved, the desirable benefits, the other components in the skin care composition and like factors.
2. Immobilizing Agent WO 00/69484 cA o23~302~ 2ooi-m-o2 PCT/US00/13842 Another key component of skin care compositions is immobilizing agents.
Immobilizing agents are capable of thickening emollients of skin care compositions.
Immobilizing agents may be soluble in emollients or insoluble in emollients.
Without wishing to be bound by the theory, it is believed that immobilizing agents form 5 microscopic networks in the skin care composition (e.g., emollient) to thicken the skin care composition. Herein, "microscopic network" refers to the network whose units are molecules of immobilizing agents being soluble in emollients, or particles of immobilizing agents being insoluble in emollients. Particularly, "microscopic network"
of immobilizing agents being soluble in emollients is sometimes referred to as "liquid 10 crystal". In the microscopic network, molecules or particles form flexible/weak connection among molecules or particles.
The immobilizing agent should be homogeneously dispersed in the skin care composition such that less amount of immobilizing agent is required to impart expected thickening. Less amount of immobilizing agent contained in the skin care composition 15 allows more amount of emollient, which is one of the actives for expected skin effects, in the skin care composition. The immobilizing agent homogeneously dispersed in the skin care composition also enables to control variability of the quality of the skin care composition. Preferably, the immobilizing agent has sufficient solubility or dispersability in the emollient. In most cases and preferred cases, the emollients are hydrophobic. In 20 this case the immobilizing agents should be also hydrophobic so that the emollient and the immobilizing agent can achieve a desired homogeneous mixture. The immobilizing agents and the emollients are sometimes compounded while both of them are molten.
The immobilizing agents being soluble in emollients can be selected from the group consisting of C 14-C24 fatty alcohols, C 12-C24 fatty acids, and C 12-C24 fatty 25 alcohol ethoxylates having an average degree of ethoxylation ranging from 2 to about 30, and mixtures thereof. Preferred immobilizing agents include C16-C24 fatty alcohols, more preferably C 1 g-C24 fatty alcohols. Representative examples include stearyl alcohol, arachidyl alcohol, behenyl alcohol, lignoceryl alcohol, and mixtures thereof.
Herein, "stearyl alcohol" refers to a mixtured fatty alcohol containing C 1 g fatty alcohol as 30 a major component. Herein, "arachidyl alcohol" refers to a mixtured fatty alcohol containing C20 fatty alcohol as a major component. Herein, "behenyl alcohol"
refers to a mixtured fatty alcohol containing C22 fatty alcohol as a major component.
Herein, "lignocaryl alcohol" refers to a mixtured fatty alcohol containing C24 fatty alcohol as a major component. Preferably, the immobilizing agent comprises behenyl alcohol.
Behenyl alcohol as the immobilizing agent preferably comprises C22 fatty alcohol as a WO 00/69484 cA o23~302~ 2ooi-ii-o2 PCT/US00/13842 major component and a minor quantity of C24 fatty alcohol. Behenyl alcohol may also comprise C 1 g fatty alcohol and C20 fatty alcohol. By containing a minor quantity of C24 fatty alcohol in behenyl alcohol, behenyl alcohol provides the emollients with more stability and more efficiently immobilizes the emollients of the skin care composition.
When behenyl alcohol comprises C 1 g fatty alcohol, C20 fatty alcohol, C22 fatty alcohol, and C24 fatty alcohol, the ratio of each component is preferably as follows:
from about 50 to about 99.99 % of C22 fatty alcohol, more preferably from about 63 % to about 84.9 of C22 fatty alcohol; from about 0.01 % to about 3 % of C24 fatty alcohol, more preferably from about 0.1 % to about 2 % of C24 fatty alcohol; from 0 % to about 27 % of C20 fatty alcohol, more preferably from about 10 % to about 20 % of C20 fatty alcohol;
from 0 % to about 20 % of C 1 g fatty alcohol, more preferably from about 5 %
to about 1 S
of C 1 g fatty alcohol. One of preferable behenyl alcohols as the immobilizing agent is Lanette 22 available from Henkel Corp. Cospha, 300 Brookside Avenue,Ambler, PA
19002.
Other preferred immobilizing agents include C16-C24 fatty acids, more preferably Clg-C24 fatty acids selected from the group consisting of stearic acid, behenic acid and mixtures thereof. Behenic acid is most preferred. Still other preferred immobilizing agents include C16-C24 fatty alcohol ethoxylates having an average degree of ethoxylation ranging from about 5 to about 20. Preferably, the fatty alcohols, fatty acids and fatty alcohols are linear and do not contain branched isomers.
Importantly, these preferred immobilizing agents such as the C 1 g-C24 fatty alcohols are assumed to provide the microscopic network in the skin care composition, thereby resulting in the skin care composition which is far thicker than only the emollients which are included in the skin care composition. These preferred immobilizing agents such as Clg-C24 fatty alcohols are soluble enough to form homogeneous mixtures of the emollients and the immobilizing agents.
Other types of immobilizing agents being soluble in emollients can be used either alone or in combination with the fatty alcohols, fatty acids, and fatty alcohol ethoxylates described above. Examples of these other types of immobilizing agents includes polyhydroxy fatty acid esters, polyhydroxy fatty acid amides, and mixtures thereof.
Preferred esters and amides will have three or more free hydroxy groups on the polyhydroxy moiety and are typically nonionic in character. Because of the possible skin sensitivity of those using article topsheets to which the skin care composition is applied, these esters and amides should also be relatively mild and non-irntating to the skin.
WO 00/69484 cA o23~302~ 2ooi-m-o2 PCT/US00/13842 Suitable polyhydroxy fatty acid esters will have the formula:
O
II
R- C -O Y
- n wherein R is a CS-C31 hydrocarbyl group, preferably straight chain C~-C19 alkyl or alkenyl, more preferably straight chain Cg-C1~ alkyl or alkenyl, most preferably straight chain C11-Cl~ alkyl or alkenyl, or mixture thereof; Y is a polyhydroxyhydrocarbyl moiety having a hydrocarbyl chain with at least 2 free hydroxyls directly connected to the chain; and n is at least 1. Suitable Y groups can be derived from polyols such as glycerol, pentaerythritol; sugars such as raffinose, maltodextrose, galactose, sucrose, glucose, xylose, fructose, maltose, lactose, mannose and erythrose; sugar alcohols such as erythritol, xylitol, malitol, mannitol and sorbitol; and anhydrides of sugar alcohols such as sorbitan.
One class of suitable polyhydroxy fatty acid esters comprises certain sorbitan esters, preferably the sorbitan esters of C16-C22 saturated fatty acids.
Because of the manner in which they are typically manufactured, these sorbitan esters usually comprise mixtures of mono-, di-, tri-, etc. esters. Representative examples of suitable sorbitan esters include sorbitan palinitates (e.g., SPAN 40), sorbitan steaibt~~s (e.g., SPAN 60), and sorbitan behenates, that comprise one or more of the mono-, di- and tri-ester versions of these sorbitan esters, e.g., sorbitan mono-, di- and tri-palmitate, sorbitan mono-, di- and tri-stearate, sorbitan mono-, di and tri-behenate, as well as mixed tallow fatty acid sorbitan mono-, di- and tri-esters. Mixtures of different sorbitan esters can also be used, such as sorbitan palmitates with sorbitan stearates. Particularly preferred sorbitan esters are the sorbitan stearates, typically as a mixture of mono-, di- and tri-esters (plus some tetraester) such as SPAN 60, and sorbitan stearates sold under the trade name GLYCOMUL-S by Lonza, Inc. Although these sorbitan esters typically contain mixtures of mono-, di- and tri-esters, plus some tetraester, the mono- and di-esters are usually the predominant species in these mixtures.
Another class of suitable polyhydroxy fatty acid esters comprises certain glyceryl monoesters, preferably glyceryl monoesters of C16-C24 saturated fatty acids such as glyceryl monostearate, glyceryl monopalmitate, and glyceryl monobehenate.
Again, like the sorbitan esters, glyceryl monoester mixtures will typically contain some di- and WO 00/69484 cA o23~302~ 2ooi-ii-o2 PCT/US00/13842 triester. However, such mixtures should contain predominantly the glyceryl monoester species to be useful.
Another class of suitable polyhydroxy fatty acid esters comprises certain sucrose fatty acid esters, preferably the C12-C24 saturated fatty acid esters of sucrose. Sucrose monoesters and diesters are particularly preferred and include sucrose mono-and di-stearate and sucrose mono- and di- laurate.
Suitable polyhydroxy fatty acid amides will have the formula:
O R~
II I
wherein Rl is H, Cl-C4 hydrocarbyl, 2-hydroxyethyl, 2-hydroxypropyl, methoxyethyl, methoxypropyl or a mixture thereof, preferably Cl-C4 alkyl, methoxyethyl or methoxypropyl, more preferably C 1 or C2 alkyl or methoxypropyl , most preferably C 1 alkyl (i.e., methyl) or methoxypropyl; and R2 is a CS-C31 hydrocarbyl group, preferably straight chain C7-C 1 g alkyl or alkenyl, more preferably straight chain Cg-C
17 alkyl or alkenyl, most preferably straight chain C11-C17 alkyl or alkenyl, or mixture thereof; and Z is a polyhydroxyhydrocarbyl moiety having a linear hydrocarbyl chain with at least 3 hydroxyls directly connected to the chain. See U.S. patent 5,174, 927 (Honsa), issued December 29, 1992 (herein incorporated by reference) which discloses these polyhydroxy fatty acid amides, as well as their preparation.
The Z moiety preferably will be derived from a reducing sugar in a reductive amination reaction; most preferably glycityl. Suitable reducing sugars include glucose, fructose, maltose, lactose, galactose, mannose, and xylose. High dextrose corn syrup, high fructose corn syrup, and high maltose corn syrup can be utilized, as well as the individual sugars listed above. These corn syrups can yield mixtures of sugar components for the Z moiety.
The Z moiety preferably will be selected from the group consisting of -CH2_ (CHOH)n-CH20H, -CH(CH20H)-[(CHOH)n-1]-CH20H, -CH20H-CH2-(CHOH)2(CHOR3)(CHOH)-CH20H, where n is an integer from 3 to 5, and R3 is H or a cyclic or aliphatic monosaccharide. Most preferred are the glycityls where n is 4, particularly -CH2-(CHOH)4-CH20H.
WO 00/69484 cA o23~302~ 2ooi-m-o2 PCT/US00/13842 In the above formula, R1 can be, for example, N-methyl, N-ethyl, N-propyl, N-isopropyl, N-butyl, N-2-hydroxyethyl, N-methoxypropyl or N-2-hydroxypropyl,.
R2 can be selected to provide, for example, cocamides, stearamides, oleamides, lauramides, myristamides, capricamides, palmitamides, tallowamides, etc. The Z moiety can be 1-deoxyglucityl, 2-deoxyfructityl, 1-deoxymaltityl, 1-deoxylactityl, 1-deoxygalactityl, 1-deoxymannityl, 1-deoxymaltotriotityl, etc.
The most preferred polyhydroxy fatty acid amides have the general formula:
O R~ OH
II I I
wherein R1 is methyl or methoxypropyl; R2 is a C11-Cl~ straight-chain alkyl or alkenyl group. These include N-lauryl-N-methyl glucamide, N-lauryl-N-methoxypropyl glucamide, N-cocoyl-N-methyl glucamide, N-cocoyl-N-methoxypropyl glucamide, N-palmityl-N-methoxypropyl glucamide, N-tallowyl-N-methyl glucamide, or N-tallowyl-N-methoxypropyl glucamide.
As previously noted, some of the immobilizing agents require an emulsifier for solubilization in the emollient. This is particularly the case for certain of the glucamides such as the N-alkyl-N-methoxypropyl glucamides having HLB values of at least about 7.
Suitable emulsifiers will typically include those having HLB values below about 7. In this regard, the sorbitan esters previously described, such as the sorbitan stearates, having HLB values of about 4.9 or less have been found useful in solubilizing these glucamide immobilizing agents in petrolatum. Other suitable emulsifiers include steareth-(polyethylene glycol ethers of stearyl alcohol that conform to the formula CH3(CH2)l~(OCH2CH2)nOH, where n has an average value of 2), sorbitan tristearate, isosorbide laurate, and glyceryl monostearate. The emulsifier can be included in an amount sufficient to solubilize the immobilizing agent in the emollient such that a substantially homogeneous mixture is obtained. For example, an approximately 1:1 mixture of N-cocoyl-N-methyl glucamide and petrolatum that will normally not melt into a single phase mixture, will melt into a single phase mixture upon the addition of 20% of a 1:l mixture of Steareth-2 and sorbitan tristearate as the emulsifier.
Other types of ingredients being soluble in emollients that can be used as immobilizing agents, either alone, or in combination with the above-mentioned WO 00/69484 cA o23~302~ 2ooi-ii-o2 pCT/US00/13842 immobilizing agents, include waxes such as carnauba wax, beeswax, candelilla wax, paraffin wax, microcrystalline wax, castol wax, ceresin, esparto, ouricuri, rezowax, polyethylene wax, and other known waxes. Preferably the wax is a microcrystalline wax.
An example of a particularly preferred microcrystalline wax is Multiwax W-835, Witco 5 Corporation, One American Lane, Greenwich, CT06831-2559.
The immobilizing agents being insoluble in emollients are particulate thickeners.
Herein "particulate thickener" means the immobilizing agent being in the form of small, finely divided particles. The particulate thickener is able to enhance smooth feeling or lubricant effect of the skin care composition because of its particle structure. For 10 example, fumed silica is so spherical like a "ball" that it can act as a bearing, when shear force is applied, resulting in a lubricant effect. Bentonite or hectorite consists of a plurality of thin layers which can slide easily thus resulting in smooth feeling. The average diameter or the corresponding average diameter may be less than about microns, preferably less than about 20 microns, more preferably less than about 10 15 microns. When the particle has a different shape from a sphere, the corresponding diameter of the non-spherical particle can be represented by a diameter of a sphere having the same volume as the non-spherical particle. The corresponding diameter can be measured by Laser Particle Analyzer supplied by Honeywell Inc., Honeywell Plaza, Minneapolis, MN, under the designation of Microtrac X-100.
20 The particulate thickener is essentially insoluble in the emollient but can be dispersed forming the microscopic network therein and provide a solid structure for the emollient. The particulate thickener can be selected from the group consisting of silica, treated silica, fumed silica, polyrnethacrylate polymers, polymethacrylate and styrene copolymers, calicum silicate, treated calcium silicate, treated bentonite, treated hectorite, 25 and mixtures thereof. A preferred particulate thickener for use herein is fumed silica.
More preferred for use herein is surface-treated fumed silica. Even more preferred is a fumed silica selected from the group consisting of polyalkylsiloxane treated fumed silica, trialkylsilanized fumed silica, dialkyldisilanized fumed silica, and mixtures thereof. Most preferred is a fumed silica selected from the group consisting of polydimethylsiloxane 30 treated fumed silica, trimethylsilanized fumed silica, dimethyldisilanized finned silica, and mixtures thereof.
Silica is also known as silicon dioxide or silicic anhydride, which can be represented by the chemical formula Si02. A variety of different types of silicas which are useful herein, are known fumed or arced silica, precipitated silica, silica gel, WO 00/69484 cA o23~302~ 2ooi-ii-o2 PCT/US00/13842 amorphous silica, and silica sols and colloids. Fumed silica, which is also known as arced silica, is produced by the vapor phase hydrolysis of silicon tetrachloride in a hydrogen oxygen flame. Without being limited by theory, it is believed that the combustion process creates silicon dioxide molecules which condense to form particles. The particles collide, attach and sinter together. The result of this process is a three dimensional branched chain aggregate. Once the aggregate cools below the fusion point of silica, which is about 1710° C., further collisions result in mechanical entanglement of the chains to form agglomerates. Precipitated silicas and silica gels are generally made in aqueous solution.
Amorphous silicas are generally naturally occurring microcrystalline forms of the material. Silica sols and colloids are dispersions of amorphous silica in an aqueous solution The fumed silica and treated fumed silica preferably have a mean particle size for the agglomerates, i.e., a mean agglomerate particle size, of from about 0.1 microns to about 100 microns, preferably from about 1 micron to about 50 microns, and more preferably from about 10 microns to about 30 microns. The agglomerates are composed of aggregates which having a mean particle size, i.e., a mean aggregate particle size, from about 0.01 microns to about 1 S microns, preferably from about 0.05 microns to about 10 microns, more preferably from about 0.1 microns to about 5 microns, and most preferably from about 0.2 microns to about 0.3 microns.
The fumed silica agglomerates typically have active hydroxyl groups. It is desirable to treat these fumed silicas to render the hydroxyl gro4.r~s less reactive especially when the emollient in the skin care composition is hydrophobic. A useful method of treatment is to coat the fumed silica with a nonpolar organic compound to render the active hydroxyl groups less reactive. Preferred organic compounds for treatment include polyalkylsiloxanes, with polydimethylsiloxanes being most preferred. A
commercially available polydimethylsiloxane treated fumed silicas useful herein are sold under the trade name CAB-O-Sil~ TS-720 by Cabot Corporation, Tuscola, IL, or Aerosil 8972 by Degussa AG, Germany, both of which have a surface area of around 120 mZ/g and a bulk density of 50 g/L. Another useful method of treatment is to chemically react the hydroxyl groups of the fumed silica with a silanizing agent, e.g., diemthyldichlorosiliane or hexamethyldisilizane. In these chemically treated silicas, the free hydroxyl groups of the silica are replaced with an oxygen-silicon bond of the silanizing agent. A
commercially available trimethyl silanized fumed silica is sold under the trade name CAB-0-Sil~ TS-530, by Cabot Corporation, Tuscola, IL, which has a surface area of about 220 mz/g and a bulk density of SO g/L. A commercially available dimethyldisilanized fumed silica is sold WO 00/69484 cA o23~302~ 2ooi-m-o2 PCT/US00/13842 under the trade name CAB-O-SIL~ TS-610, by Cabot Corporation, Tuscola, IL, which has a surface area of about 120 m2/g and a bulk density of 50 g/L.
The particulate thickeners also useful herein are polymethacrylate polymers and polymethacrylate and styrene copolymers. These materials are swellable polymers which are useful for absorbing liquid compositions to provide a thickening or gelling effect on the liquid. The polymethacrylate polymers are homopolymers of methacrylic acid esters, preferably the methyl or ethyl esters, which are optionally crosslinked with any of the common crosslinking agents. The polymethacrylate and styrene copolymers are copolymers of methacrylic acid esters, preferably the methyl or ethyl esters, withstyrene, which are optionally crosslinked with any of the common crosslinking agents.
The crosslinking agent is most typically a material containing two or more unsaturated functional groups. The crosslinking agent is reacted with the monomer units of the polymer or copolymer and is incorporated into the polymer thereby forming links or covalent bonds between two or more individual polymer chains or between two or more sections of the same polymer chain. Non limiting examples of suitable crosslinking agents include those selected from the group consisting of methylenebisacrylamides, diallyldialkyl ammonium halides, polyalkenyl polyethers of polyhydric alcohols, allyl acrylates, vinyloxyalkylacrylates, and polyfunctional vinylidenes. Specific examples of crosslinking agents useful herein include those selected from the group consisting of methylenebisacrylamide, ethylene glycol di-(meth)acrylate, di-(meth)acrylamide, cyanomethylacrylate, vinyloxyethylacrylate, vinyloxyethylmethacrylate, allyl pentaerythritol, trimethylolpropane diallylether, allyl sucrose, butadiene, isoprene, divinyl benzene, divinyl naphthalene, ethyl vinyl ether, methyl vinyl ether, and allyl acrylate.
Other crosslinkers include formaldehyde and glyoxal. A particularly useful crosslinked polymethacrylate polymer is sold under the trade name Polytrap~6603, by Dow Corning Corp., Midland, Mich.
The particulate thickeners also useful herein are treated bentonites and treated hectorites. Bentonite is a colloidal aluminum silicate clay. Hectorite is a clay containing sodium, magnesium, lithium silicon, oxygen, hydrogen, and fluorine. Useful herein especially when the emollient in the skin care composition is hydrophobic are bentonites and hectorites that have been treated with various organic compounds to render the clays less polar. Herein "treated" means that these materials have been coated with the organic compound. Non limiting examples of treated bentones include stearalkonium hectorite;
quaternium-18 bentonite; quaternium-18 hectorite; castor oil and stearalkonium hectorite and propylene carbonate; isopropyl myristate and stearalkonium hectorie and propylene WO 00/69484 cA o23~302~ 2ooi-m-o2 PCT/L1S00/13842 carbonate; isododecane and quaternium-18 hectorite and propylene carbonate;
lanolin oil and isopropyl palmitate and stearalkonium hectorite and propylene carbonate and propylparaben; propylene glycol dicaprylate/dicaprate and stearalkonium hectorite and propylene carbonate; mineral oil and quaternium-18 hectorite and propylene carbonate;
mineral oil and quaternium-18 hectorite and SD alcohol 40; petroleum distillates and quaternium-18 hectorite and propylene carbonate; C12-15 alkyl bnezoate and stearalknoium hectorite and propylene carbonate; cyclomethicone and quaternium-hectorite and SD alcohol 40; cyclomethicone and quaternium-18 hectorite and propylene carbonate; and mixtures thereof.
The particulate thickeners also useful herein are calcium silicate and treated calcium silicate. Common forms of calcium silicate include CaSi03, CaSi04, and CaSi05. These materials are also known as calcium salts of silicic acid. The calcium silicates can be treated with a wide variety of nonpolar organic compounds to make the materials more hydrophobic. Useful calcium silicates include the following commercially available materials: Hubersorb (Huber Corp., Harve de Grace, Md.), and Micro-Cel C, Micro-Cel E, and Micro-Cel T-38 (Celite Corp., Denver, Colo.) Most of all the particulate thickeners above can be easily dispersed in the emollient in the skin care composition thanks to the surface treatments.
Instead of the surface treatments or in combination of the treatments some emulsifiers are sometimes useful.
The amount of immobilizing agents that can be included in the skin care composition will depend on a variety of factors.
3. Skin Care Active Ingredients Various skin care active ingredients may be incorporated in the skin care composition. These skin care actives preferably provides skin care benefits.
These active ingredients include, but not limited to, skin care agents, proton donating agents, enzyme inhibitors, or mixtures thereof. The skin care composition of the present allows to reduce the initial amount of the skin care active ingredients incorporated because of less migration in storage or transportation while delivering effective amount of skin care active ingredients to the skin in use.
The skin care agents may be added to deliver a therapeutic and/or skin protective benefit. It will be recognized that of the numerous materials useful in the skin care WO 00/69484 cA o23~302~ 2ooi-m-o2 PCT/US00/13842 compositions delivered to skin, those that have been deemed safe and effective skin care agent and mixtures thereof are logical materials for use herein. Such materials include Category I actives as defined by the U.S. Food and Drug Administration's (FDA) Tentative Final Monograph on Skin Protectant Drug Products for Over-the-Counter Human Use (21 C.F.R. ~ 347), which presently include: allantoin, aluminum hydroxide gel, calamine, cocoa butter, dimethicone, cod liver oil (in combination), glycerine, kaolin, petrolatum, lanolin, mineral oil, shark liver oil, white petrolatum, talc, topical starch, zinc acetate, zinc carbonate, zinc oxide, and the like. Other potentially useful materials are Category III actives as defined by the U.S. Food and Drug Administration's Tentative Final Monograph on Skin Protectant Drug Products for Over-the-Counter Human Use (21 C.F.R. ~ 347), which presently include: live yeast cell derivatives, aldioxa, aluminum acetate, microporous cellulose, cholecalciferol, colloidal oatmeal, cysteine hydrochloride, dexpanthenol, Peruvean balsam oil, protein hydrolysates, racemic methionine, sodium bicarbonate, Vitamin A, buffered mixture of cation and anion exchange resins, corn starch, trolamine, and the like. Further, other potential materials are Category II actives as defined by the U.S. Food and Drug Administration's Tentative Final Monograph on Skin Protectant Drug Products for Over-the-Counter Human Use (21 C.F.R. ~ 347), which include: bizmuth subnitrate, boric acid, ferric chloride, polyvinyl pyrrolidone - vinyl acetate copolymers, sulfur, tannic acid, and the like. The skin care agent may be selected from these materials and mixtures thereof. As mentioned above, the materials for use should be safe.
The skin care composition may include between about 0.001 % and about SO % of the skin care agent. The concentration range of the skin care agents in the skin care composition varies from material to material. Below table shows preferred skin care agents for use and its concentration ranges in the skin care composition.
Possible concentrationPreferred concentration range (%) range (%) allantoin 0.2 - S 0.5 - 2 aluminum hydroxide 0.1 - 10 0.1 S - S
gel calamine 0.2 - 40 1 - 25 WO 00/69484 cA o23~302~ 2ooi-ii-o2 pCT/US00/13842 cocoa butter 30 - SO 40 - 50 dimethicone 0.2 - 40 1 - 30 glycerine 5 - 50 20 - 45 kaolin 2 - 30 4 - 20 petrolatum 30 - 50 40 - 50 shark liver oil 0.1 - 10 1 - 5 white petrolatum 30 - 50 40 - SO
zinc acetate 0.05 - 10 0.1 - 2 zinc carbonate 0.05 - 10 0.2 - 2 zinc oxide 0.1 - 25 0.3 - 8 It should be understood that the skin care composition may include the materials listed above beyond its range. For example, when the skin care composition comprises 40 of petrolatum as an emollient and 50 % of petrolatum as an skin care agent (another 10 may be immobilizing agent), 90 % of the skin care composition may be petrolatum.
5 Many of the FDA monographed skin care agents are currently utilized in commercially available skin care products, such as A and D~ Ointment, Vaseline~
Petroleum Jelly, Desitin~ Diaper Rash Ointment and Daily Care~ ointment, Gold Bond ~ Medicated Baby Powder, Aquaphor~ Healing Ointment, Baby Magic~ Baby Lotion, Johnson's Ultra Sensitive~ Baby Cream. Those skin case ingredients and/or products 10 may be incorporated to create treated articles.
The proton donating actives may be added to help maintain a wearer's skin at its natural acidic pH. For example such proton donating actives can be effective in neutralizing any high pH (i.e. >7) components of bodily exudates. Chemically suitable proton donating actives are effective in helping maintain skin pH in at least a slightly 15 acidic condition. A non limiting and exemplary listing of proton donating actives includes: monomeric organic acids; acid salts of organic or inorganic acids;
and polymeric organic acids and salts thereof. Certain combinations of an acid and a salt thereof, commonly known as buffers, are also suitable as long as an aqueous solution of the WO 00/69484 cA o23~302~ 2ooi-m-o2 PCT/US00/13842 acid/salt combination has a pH less than 7. A suitable acid or acid salt should have at least one pKa between about 2.0 and about 6.5. The preferred range of pKa values for suitable proton donating actives is between about 2.5 and about 5Ø Preferred proton donating actives include pharmaceutically acceptable monomeric and polymeric organic acids.
Exemplary monomeric organic acids suitable for use include: citric, malic, adipic, glutaric, lactic, sorbic, salicylic, tartaric, malefic, fumaric, malonic, glycolic, and succinic acids.
Exemplary organic polymeric acids include: acidic vinyl polymers, for example, homopolymers of unsaturated carboxylic acid and anhydride monomers such as acrylic acid itself, methacrylic acid, a-chloroacrylic acid, a-cyanoacrylic acid, (3-methylacrylic acid (crotonic acid), a-phenylacrylic acid, (3-acryloxypropionic acid, sorbic acid, a-chlorosorbic acid, angelic acid, cinnamic acid, p-chlorocinnamic acid, (3-stearylacrylic acid, itaconic acid, citraconic acid, mesaconic acid, glutaconic acid, aconitic acid, malefic acid, fumaric acid, tricarboxyethylene, and malefic anhydride, copolymers of unsaturated monomeric acids with suitable co-monomers, and partially neutralized salts of such polymers; acidic cellulose derivatives, such as carboxymethyl cellulose at least partially wherein the cellulose derivatives are at least partially protonated, cellulose phosphate, and oxidized cellulose; and cation exchange resins wherein the cation exchange resin is at least partially protonated.
Exemplary inorganic acid salts include alkali metal monohydrogen phosphates, blends of alkali metal monohydrogen and dihydrogen phosphate salts, alkali metal monohydrogen pyrophosphate salts, and blends of alkali metal monohydrogen and dihydrogen pyrophosphate salts.
Materials which can decompose in the environment adjacent to a wearer's skin into a proton donating active are also suitable for use. For example, esterase enzymes in feces (e.g. fecal lipases) can hydrolyze certain esters to provide a proton donating active.
Suitable proton donating actives of this type have the formula:
WO 00/69484 cA o23~302~ 2ooi-m-o2 PCT/US00/13842 H O
- -O
- --O
H
wherein R1, R2 and R3 are independently hydrogen, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, or a hydroxyalkyl group with from 1 to 4 carbon atoms. An exemplary ester of this type is triacetin.
In order that the proton donating active be effective in helping maintain skin at an acidic pH the proton donating active should be provided at a level of at least 0.01 % of the skin care composition; typically at least about 0.5%; preferably at least about 3%. Such suitable proton donating actives may be used as a component of the skin care compositions at a level of between about 0.01 % and about 40%, depending on the specific proton donating active chosen. Preferably, the proton donating actives are used at a level of between about 0.5% and about 20% of the skin care composition. In particularly preferred embodiments, the proton donating actives are provided at a level of between about 3% and about 7%.
These and other features of proton donating actives are disclosed in U.S.
Patent Application Serial No. 09/041509 entitled "Proton Donating Actives in Absorbent Articles" filed in the name of McOsker, et al. on March 12, 1998, which is incorporated herein by reference.
The inhibitors against enzymes may be added to be available at the skin/urine, skin/feces, skin/menses interfaces to inhibit enzymatic activity on the skin and to reduce or prevent the occurrence of inflammation. Inhibitors of enzyme activity are well known and are typically classified as competitive inhibitors (which compete with the substrate for binding at the active site on the enzyme) and non-competitive inhibitors (which bind to a site other than the active site to inactivate the enzyme). Many enzymes, such as metalloproteases, are inhibited by substances that bind with a metal group on th'~ enzyme.
Chelating agents are effective inhibitors of other enzymes that require the presence of metal ions, such as the ions of calcium, cobalt, copper, magnesium, manganese, sodium, potassium, or zinc, for activation. Since enzymes are proteins, antibodies raised against specific enzymes are also effective enzyme inhibitors.
WO 00/69484 cA o23~302~ 2ooi-m-o2 PCT/US00/13842 Enzyme inhibitors useful in the absorbent articles described herein will typically have an ICSO value of not more than about 500 ~M, more typically not more than about 250 p,M, and still more typically not more than about 100 ~M. As used herein, the term "ICSp"means the inhibitory concentration (e.g., a micromolar concentration, ~,M) of a substance (inhibitor) which reduces the rate of substrate cleavage by an enzyme by 50%.
The ICSp is calculated according to the equation ICSp =[I]/[(v/v;)-1], where [I] is the inhibitor concentration tested, v is the rate of substrate cleavage in the absence of the inhibitor and v; is the rate of substrate cleavage in the presence of the inhibitor. The ICSp of an enzyme inhibitor may be measured by a Purified Enzyme method or by a Fecal Enzyme method which is described in U.S. Patent Application Serial No. 09/041266 entitled "Disposable Absorbent Article Having A Skin Care Composition Containing An Enzyme Inhibitor" filed in the name of Roe, et al. on March 12, 1998. It will be understood that certain enzyme inhibitors (e.g., EDTA) will have higher ICSO values but will still be useful in the absorbent articles described herein. For materials for which the molecular weight cannot be determined, such materials will typically reduce enzyme activity by at least 50% at a concentration in the skin care composition of not more than about 5 percent by weight.
Without limitation, any type of enzyme inhibitor may be employed in the skin care compositions transferable to the wearer's skin, including any naturally occurnng inhibitor of plant, microbial and/or animal origin (including human) and synthetically manufactured chemical inhibitor. The enzyme inhibitors may be hydrophilic or hydophobic in nature and may thus be water soluble or soluble in a hydrophobic vehicle. The enzyme inhibitors are preferably present in the skin care composition in a concentration of about 0.001 % to about 50% by weight, typically about 0.01 % to about 25%, more typically about 0.1 % to about 10%, and most typically about 0.1 % to about 5 %. Because of the variety of enzyme inhibitors employed, the effective concentration of each inhibitor must be separately determined, as known to those skilled in the art.
The enzyme inhibitors may be employed singly or as a mixture of enzyme inhibitors such as a "cocktail" of inhibitors in a single absorbent article.
Moreover, different enzyme inhibitors may be employed in skin care compositions in different locations in a single absorbent article.
Because of the wide diversity of enzymes present in body exudates, it is reasonably predictable that materials such as those described below which inhibit certain classes of enzymes (e.g., proteases) may also inhibit enzymes which cleave substrates other than those specified (e.g., proteins and peptides). Hence, inhibitors which inhibit WO 00/69484 cA o23~302~ 2ooi-m-o2 PCT/US00/13842 proteases may also inhibit lipases and other esterases, amylases and/or ureases and vice versa.
Inhibitors of enzymes and/or coenzymes most frequently found in body exudates are preferred in the skin care compositions. Thus, the enzyme inhibitors are preferably inhibitors of proteolytic enzymes such as trypsin, chymotrypsin, aminopeptidase and elastase; lipases; bile salts; amylases; and/or ureases.
Exemplary suitable inhibitors of proteases for use that are believed to inhibit the type of protease indicated in parentheses include, but are not limited to, soybean trypsin inhibitor and other plant-derived trypsin inhibitors such as lima bean protease inhibitor, com protease inhibitor and the like; Bowman-Birk inhibitor (serine, trypsin-like protease inhibitor); pancreatic trypsin inhibitor such as bovine pancreatic basic trypsin inhibitor and other animal-derived pancreatic trypsin inhibitors; egg white trypsin inhibitor (serine, trypsin-like protease inhibitor); ovomucoids containing ovoinhibitors such as from chicken or turkey egg white (trypsin and chymotrypsin inhibitors); chymostatin (serine, chymotrypsin-like protease inhibitor); aprotinin (serine protease inhibitor);
leupeptin and its analogs such as propionyl-leupeptin, N-a-t-BOC-deacetylleupeptin (serine and cysteine protease inhibitor); bestatin and its analogs such as epibestatin and nitrobestatin (aminopeptidase metalloprotease inhibitor); amastatin and its analogs such as epiamastatin (aminopeptidase inhibitor); antipain (trypsin inhibitor); antithrombin III
(serine protease inhibitor); hirudin (thrombin-like serine protease inhibitor); cystatin (egg white cysteine protease inhibitor); E-64 (trans-epoxysuccinyl-L-leucylamido-(4-~~.aanidino)-butane) and its analogs (cysteine protease inhibitor); a2-macroglobulin (universal endoprotease inhibitor);
al-antitrypsin (trypsin inhibitor); pepstatin and its analogs such as acetyl pepstatin, pepstatin A, Nle-Sta-Ala-Sta (aspartyl protease inhibitor); apstatin (aminopeptidase P
inhibitor); (2R)-2-mercaptomethyl-4-methylpentanoyl-b-(2-naphthyl)-Ala-Ala amide (matrix metalloprotease inhibitor); (2R)-2-mercaptomethyl-4-methylpentanoyl-Phe-Ala amide (matrix metalloprotease inhibitor); N-acetyl-Leu-Leu-methioninal (calpain inhibitor);
N-acetyl-Leu-Leu-norleucinal (calpain inhibitor); p-aminobenzyol-Gly-Pro-D-Leu-D-Ala hydroxamic acid (matrix metalloprotease inhibitor); 2(R)-[N-(4-methoxyphenylsulfonyl)-N-(3-pyridylmethyl)amino]-3-methylbutano-hydroxamic acid (metalloprotease inhibitor); L-1-chloro-3-[4-tosylamido]-7-amino-2-heptanone-HCl (TLCK), L-1-chloro-3-[4-tosylamido]-4-phenyl-2-butanone (TPCK), tranexamic acid, glycyrrhizic acid, 18-(3-glycyrrhetinic acid, colloidal oat extracts, elhibin, zinc salts, iodoacetate, phenylmethylsulfonyl fluoride, phosphoramidon, 4-(2-aminoethyl)-benzenesulfonylfluoride HCI, 3,4-dichloroiso-coumarin, quercetin, and the like, and mixtures thereof.
WO 00/69484 cA o23~302~ 2ooi-m-o2 PCT/US00/13842 Chelating agents have also been found to be useful as inhibitors of both proteases and ureases at a concentration of about 0.1 % to about 2%. Exemplary chelating agents are phytic acid, nitrilotriacetic acid, EDTA, diethylene triamino pentacetic acid, hyroxyethyl ethylene diamine triacetic acid, and the corresponding acid salts, disclosed in 5 U.S. Patent No. 5,091,193 issued to Enjolras on February 25, 1992, the disclosure of which is hereby incorporated by reference.
Among preferred protease inhibitors are compounds that exhibit inhibitory activity that is not necessarily restricted to a single class of proteases. Such compounds include, but are not limited to, hexamidine and its salts; pentamidine and its salts;
benzamidine, p-10 aminobenzamidine and their derivatives; and guanidinobenzoic acid and its derivatives such as those disclosed in U.S. Patent No. 5,376,655 issued to Imaki et al. on December 27, 1994, the disclosure of which is hereby incorporated by reference. Other preferred protease inhibitors include polymer derivatives of guanidinobenzoic acid disclosed and made in U.S.
Patent Application Serial No. 09/041196 entitled "Enzyme Inhibitors" filed in the name of 15 Mclver, et al. on March 12, 1998, the disclosure of which is hereby incorporated by reference.
Protease inhibitors that are preferred in the practice are soybean trypsin inhibitor, aprotinin, hexamidine (e.g., hexamidine diisethionate), p-aminobenzamidine, leupeptin, pepstatin A, chymostatin and polymer derivatives of guanidinobenzoic acid (disclosed and 20 made in U.S. Patent Application Serial No. 09/041196 entitled "Enzyme Inhibitors"
incorporated by reference above). Particularly preferred protease inhibitors are soybean trypsin inhibitor, hexamidine, p-aminobenzamidine and the foregoing polymer derivatives of guanidinobenzoic acid.
Ureases are known to be inhibited in the presence of trace amounts of heavy metal 25 ions, such as those of silver, copper, and the like. Thus, trace amounts (as little as 0.001 or less) of salts of these metals are useful as unease inhibitors. Other exemplary inhibitors of unease activity include, but are not limited to, acetyl hydroxamic acid and its derivatives, such as cinnamoyl hydroxamic acid and other alkyl hydroxamic acids;
phosphoramidate and its derivatives. Such compounds are competitive inhibitors of 30 unease at a concentration of about 2 micromolar (~M). Chelating agents have also been found to be useful as inhibitors of both proteases and ureases at a concentration of about 0.1% to about 2%. Exemplary chelating agents are phytic acid, nitrilotriacetic acid, ethylenediamine tetraacetic acid (EDTA), diethylene triamino pentacetic acid, hyroxyethyl ethylene diamine triacetic acid, and the corresponding acid salts, disclosed in U.S. Patent 35 No. 5,091,193 incorporated by reference above. Other unease inhibiting compounds are WO 00/69484 cA o23~302~ 2ooi-ii-o2 pCT/US00/13842 disclosed in U.S. Patent 3,935,862 issued to Kraskin on February 3, 1976, the disclosure of which is hereby incorporated by reference, and include amino acid compounds, such as hydroxyalkylamino acids, sulfhydryl amino acids, aminosulfonic acids, aminophosphonic acid compounds and ether amino acids such as methoxyethyliminodiacetic acid, ethylene-bis-(oxypropylaminodiacetic acid), ethylene-bis-(oxyethyliminodiacetic acid), amino-methyl phosphonic acid (N,N-diacetic acid), and the like, and aminopolycarboxylic acid compounds. including acids and salts diethylenetri-aminepentaacetic acid (DTPA), N-hydroxy-ethylethylenediaminetriacetic acid (HEDTA), and the like.
Other suitable inhibitors of urease are disclosed in U.S. Patent No. 5,409,903 issued to Polak et al. on April 25, 1995, the disclosure of which is hereby incorporated by reference. This patent discloses dibasic magnesium phosphate, dialdehyde polysaccharides and zeolite, used alone in combination with each other or with the calcium compounds, calcium acetate, calcium chloride, calcium gluconate and calcium lactate as well as the magnesium compounds, magnesium chloride and magnesium citrate, for inhibition of ureases.
Suitable lipase inhibitors include, but are not limited to, water soluble salts of metals, such as cadmium, cobalt, copper, iron, molybdenum, silver, lanthanum, tin and zinc. Exemplary lipase inhibiting compounds are disclosed in U.S. Patent 4,556,560, hereby incorporated by reference, and include zinc chloride, zinc acetate, zinc nitrate trihydrate, zinc nitrate hexahydrate, zinc sulfate, zinc sulfate heptahydrate, zinc sulfate hexahydrate, iron(II) chloride, iron(I~ chloride tetrahydrate, iron(Ill) chloride, iron(>TI) chloride monohydrate, iron(IB) chloride hexahydrate, iron(II) lactate, iron(>~
lactate, iron(I>I) malate, iron(I>] nitrate, iron( nitrate hexahydrate, iron(III) nitrate-9Hz0, iron(II) sulfate and its hydrates, iron(BI) sulfate and its hydrates, copper sulfate pentahydrate, tin chloride, cobalt chloride and lanthanum chloride, zinc salts of both saturated and unsaturated monocarboxylic acids having about 6 to about 12 carbon atoms, block copolymers of propylene oxide and ethylene oxide (e.g., marketed as Pluronic~ and Tetronic~ by BASF Corp.), glycerol triesters of fatty acids having from about 2 to about 20 carbons such as triacetin, and the like. Other useful lipase inhibitors are disclosed in U.S. Patent 5,091,193, hereby incorporated by reference, and include esters of fatty alcohols, such as saturated or unsaturated, linear or branched alkyl acetate, lactate or propionate containing 10 to 20 carbon atoms; saturated or unsaturated, linear or branched zinc salts of fatty acids of 2 to 22 carbon atoms, such as those formed with propionic acid isobutyric acid, caproic acid, undecylenic acid, and the like; zinc salts of aminated acylated acids, such as propionylcysteine, propionyl-hydroxyproline or caproylcysteine, WO 00/69484 cA o23~302~ 2ooi-m-o2 PCT/US00/13842 and the like. Lipase inhibitors, such as the foregoing, have been found to be useful at a concentration of about 0.01 % to about 10%.
Still other useful lipase inhibitors, disclosed in European Patent Application Serial No. 97120699.0 entitled "Skin Rash Prevention Composition" filed in the name of Palumbo, et al. on Nobember 26, 1997, the disclosure of which is hereby incorporated by reference, include specific ester compounds that act as a substitute substrate for fecal lipases and thereby are competitive lipase inhibitors. These esters have the formulas:
R6 C ~A~C ~B~--R3 JY ~~~x Y
R1 R2 (1) or I7 i9 R8-C~A~C~B~R3 ~y~ ~x~ ~y C=O C=O
O O
R10 R11 (II) wherein R1 and each R2 independently are an acyl group with from 2 to 22 carbon atoms, or an alkyl, alkenyl, arylalkyl, hydroxyalkyl group with from 1 to 24 carbon atoms or hydrogen, whereby at least one of R1 and R2 is such an acyl group, R3 R4, R5, R6, R7, Rg, and R9 are independently an alkyl, alkenyl, arylalkyl, hydroxyalkyl, alkoxy groups of from 1 to 24 carbon atoms, hydroxy group or hydrogen; R10 and R11 are independently an alkyl, alkenyl, arylalkyl, hydroxyalkyl, alkoxy groups of from 2 to 24 carbon atoms, hydroxy group or hydrogen; A and B are independently a C1-C6 linear or branched alkylene, alkenylene, alkoxylene, hydroxyalkylene groups; the values of x are independently from 0 to 15; the values of y are independently 0 or l, with the proviso that when x =2 and y=0, at least one R2 is an alkyl, alkenyl, arylalkyl, hydroxyalkyl group with from 1 to 24 carbon atoms or hydrogen.
WO 00/69484 cA o23~302~ 2ooi-ii-o2 pCT/LTS00/13842 Still further examples of lipase inhibitors are those disclosed in U.S. patent 5,643,874, hereby incorporated by reference, which include: (2S,3S ,SS)-S-[(S)-formamido-4-methyl-valeryloxy]-2-hexyl-3-hydroxy-hexadecanoic 1,3 acid lactone, also known as tetrahydrolipstatin; (2S ,3S,SS,7Z, lOZ)-S-[(S)-2-formamido-4-methyl-valeryloxy]-2-hexyl-3-hydroxy-7,10-hexadecadienoic 1,3 acid lactone, also known as lipstatin;l-(trans-4-isobutylcyclohexyl)-2-(phenylsulfonyloxy)ethanone, also known as FL-386; 4-methylpiperidine-1-carboxylic acid 4-phenoxyphenyl ester, also known as WAY-121898; N-[3-chloro-4-(trifluoromethyl)phenyl-]N'-[3-(trifluoromethyl)-phenyl]urea, also known as BAY-N-3176; N-formyl-L-valine-(S)-1 -[[(2S, 3S)-3-hexyl-4-oxo-2-oxetanyl]methyl]hexyl ester, also known as valilactone;
(2S,3S,SS,7Z,lOZ)-5-[(S)-2-acetamido-3-carbamoylpropionyloxy]-2-hexyl-3-hydroxy-7,10-hexadecadienoic lactone, also known as esterastin; (3S,4S)-4-[(1S,SR,7S,8R,9R,E)-8-hydroxy 1,3,5,7,9-pentamethyl-6-oxo-3-undecenyl]-3-methyl-2-oxetanone, also known as ebelactone A;
(3S,4S)-3-ethyl-4-[(1 S,SR,7S,8R,9R,E)-8-hydroxy-1,3,5,7,9-pentamethyl-6-oxo-3-undecenyl]-2-oxetanone, also known as ebelactone B; and 1,6-di(O-(carbamoyl)cyclohexanone oxime)hexane, also known as RHC 80267.
Exemplary inhibitors of bile salts that are coenzymes for lipolytic enzymes and are useful as lipase enzyme inhibitors in the absorbent articles include, but are not limited to, cationic compounds disclosed in European Patent Application Serial No.
97120700.6 entitled "Skin Care Composition" filed in the name of Palumbo, et al. on Nobember 26, 1997, the disclosure of which is hereby incorporated by reference. Such compounds have the formulas:
R4 N+ R1 M- (n or ~1 M-R7 RS - I +-R6 R8 x (II) WO 00/69484 cA o23~302~ 2ooi-m-o2 pCT/US00/13842 or an amphoteric compound and preferably an acidity source, the amphoteric compound having at its iso-electric point the formula:
Rl M-Rg-N+-A-BH
Rl0 (III) for preparation of a composition for treatment, prevention or reduction of lipolytic dermatitis of the external skin, wherein Rl, R2, R3 and R4 are independently a Cl-C22 alkyl, alkenyl, aryl, arylalkyl, amidoalkyl, (poly) alkoxy, hydroxyalkyl, or acyl groups, or two or more groups of Rl, R2, R3 and R4 form together one or more ring structures; R5, R6 and A are independently a Cl-C22 alkylene, alkenylene, (poly) alkoxylene, hydroxyalkylene, arylalkylene or amido alkylene groups; R7 and Rg are independently a Cl-C4 alkyl, alkenyl, alkoxy group or a hydroxy group or hydrogen; R9 and Rl0 are independently a Cl-C22 alkyl, alkenyl, aryl, arylalkyl, amidoalkyl, (poly) alkoxy, hydroxyalkyl, or acyl groups, or two or more of the groups Rl, R9 and Rl0 form together one or more ring structures; BH is a proton donating group; x is from 2 to 4;
and M- is a counter ion.
Another exemplary suitable bile salt inhibitor is cholestyramine, described in a publication by C. Michael White et al., entitled "Cholestyramine Ointment to Treat Buttocks Rash and Anal Excoriation in an Infant", The Annals of Pharmacotherapy 30:
954-956, Sept. 1996.
Derivatives of p-guanidinobenzoic acid, especially esters of p-guanidinobenzoic acid, have been described as inhibitors of esterases. Such inhibitors are useful in the skin care compositions of the absorbent articles, and are disclosed in U.S. Patent 5,376,655 issued to Imaki et al. on December 27, 1994, the disclosure of which is hereby incorporated by reference.
Suitable amylase inhibitors and/or glucosidase amylase inhibitors include those disclosed in U.S. patent 5,643,874, hereby incorporated by reference, and include O-4,6-dideoxy-4-[[ [ 1 S-( 1 a,4a,5 (3,6a)]-4,5,6-trihydroxy-3-(hydroxymethyl)-2-cyclohexen-1-yl]amino]-a-D-glucopyranosyl-(1~4)O-a-D-glucopyranosyl-(1-~4)-D-glucose, also known as acarbose; 2(S),3(R),4(S),5(S)-tetrahydroxy-N-[2-hydroxy-1-(hydroxymethyl)-ethyl]-5-(hydroxymethyl)-1(S)-cyclohexamine, also known as voglibose;l,5-dideoxy-1,5-[(2-hydroxyethyl)imino]-D-glucitol, also known as miglitol; 1,5-dideoxy-1,5-[2-(4-ethoxycarbonylphenoxy)-ethylimino]-D-glucitol, also known as emiglitate; 2,6-dideoxy-WO 00/69484 cA o23~302~ 2ooi-ii-o2 PCT/US00/13842 2,6-imino-7-((3-D-glucopyranosyl)-D-glycero-L-guloheptitol, also known as MDL-25637;
1,5-dideoxy-1,5-(6-deoxy-1-O-methyl-a-D-glucopyranos-6-ylimino)-D-glucitol, also known as camiglibose;1,5,9,11,14-pentahydroxy-3-methyl-8,13-dioxo-5,6,8,13-tetrahydrobenzo[a]-naphthacene-2-carboxylic acid, also known pradimicin Q;
also known 5 as adiposine; and 1,2-dideoxy-2-[2(S),3(S),4(R)-trihydroxy-5-(hydroxymethyl)-cyclohexen-1(S)-ylamino]-L-glucopyranose, also known as salbostatin. Other suitable amylase inhibitors include tendamistat, trestatins, and those derived from plants, especially from wheat, rice, maize, barley and other cereal grains, beans, and seaweed.
These and other features of enzyme inhibitors are disclosed in U.S. Patent 10 Application Serial No. 09/041232 entitled "Protease Inhibitors in Absorbent Articles"
filed in the name of Rourke, et al. on March 12, 1998, and U.S. Patent Application Serial No. 09/041266 entitled "Disposable Absorbent Article Having A Skin Care Composition Containing An Enzyme Inhibitor" filed in the name of Roe, et al. on March 12, 1998, both of which are incorporated herein by reference.
15 The skin care active ingredients are soluble or insoluble. Insoluble skin care active ingredients may be dispersed in skin care composition with dispersing agents to form homogeneous mixture of skin care composition. It is preferable that the insoluble skin care active ingredients are pre-dispersed in pre-dispersion solvents with dispersing agents. Pre-dispersion solvents may be petroleum-based, fatty acid ester, alkyl ethoxylate, 20 fatty acid ester ethoxylates, fatty alcohol, polysiloxane, or mixtures of them. Further, pre-dispersion solvents may be soluble skin care active ingredients. Exemplary preferable dispersing agents are diethanolamine polyoxyethylene oleyl ether phosphate, polyhydroxystearic acid, polyglyceryl - 6 polyricinoleate, neopentyl glycol diisostearate, propylene glycol dicaprate, or mixtures thereof. Other possible dispersing agents are 25 isoelcosane and polyisobutene and quaternium 18, phenyltrimethicone and quaternium 18 hectorite and triethyl citrate, isohexadecane and quaternium - 18 hectorite and propylene carbonate, octyldodecanol and quaternium - 18 hectorite and propylene carbonate, mineral oil and quaternium - 18 hectorite and propylene carbonate, isopropyl myristate and stearalkonium hectorite and propylene carbonate, cyclomethicone and 30 quaternium - 18 and SDA 40, lanolin oil and isopropyl palmitate and stearalkonium hectorite and propylene carbonate and propyl paraben, 1 - eicosanol, or mixtures thereof.
4. Other Optional Component Skin care compositions may comprise other optional components. These optional components include water, hydrophilic surfactants, viscosity modifiers, perfumes, film WO 00/69484 cA o23~302~ 2ooi-m-o2 PCT/US00/13842 formers, deodorants, opacifiers, solvents, and the like. Stabilizers may be added to enhance the shelf life of the skin care composition such as cellulose derivatives, proteins and lecithin. Hydrophilic surfactants may be added to promote rapid transfer of the fluid (e.g., urine, menses etc.) from the topsheet to the absorbent inner layers of the article. The detail of such hydrophilic surfactant is disclosed in, e.g.; U.S. Patent 5,643,588 , "Diaper Having a Lotioned Topsheet", issued to Roe, Bakes & Warner on July 1, 1997, which is incorporated herein by reference.
C. Treating Body Contacting Surface With Skin Care Composition In preparing products treated with skin care compositions according to the present invention, the skin care composition is applied onto at least a portion of the body facing surface of absorbent articles. Any of a variety of application methods that evenly distribute viscous materials can be used. Suitable methods include printing, spraying, coating, brushing, extrusion, or combinations of these application techniques.
The minimum level of skin care composition to be applied onto the body contacting surface of the article is an amount effective for providing the skin effects to the wearer. The level of skin care compositions applied will depend on various factors, including the relative amount of surface area of the body contacting surface not treated with skin care composition, expected skin effects of the skin care composition and the like. The amount of the skin care composition can also vary over the body contacting surface. For example, some portions of the body contacting surface can have greater or lesser amounts of skin care composition than the other portions of the body contacting surface, including portions of the surface that do not have any skin care composition on it.
The skin care composition can be applied onto the entire surface of the body contacting surface or selectively onto the portions of the body contacting surface. For example, if the skin care composition is applied to the topsheet of absorbent article, the way of applying the skin care composition onto the topsheet of absorbent articles is preferable such that the skin care composition is distributed primarily on body facing part of the topsheet. However, if the skin care composition is relatively hydrophobic, it is preferable that the skin care composition is not distributed in the fluid path (such as apertures of the topsheet) and does not block the fluid path to ensure the ability of the topsheet to transmit fluid to the underlying absorbent core. Examples of the pattern of the coating include stripes, dots, circles or the Like.
WO 00/69484 cA o23~302~ 2ooi-ii-o2 pCT/IJS00/13842 The skin care composition can be applied to the body contacting surface at any point during assembly. For example, the skin care composition can be applied to the body contacting surface of the finished absorbent article before it has been packaged. The skin care composition can also be applied to the body contacting surface before it is combined with the other raw materials to form the finished absorbent article.
The skin care composition is typically applied from a melt thereof to the article.
Since the skin care composition melts at significantly above ambient temperatures, it is usually applied as a heated coating to the body contacting surface of the article. The temperature is determined considering primarily the melting point of the skin care composition and the other factors such as lowering of the temperature in the manufacturing process of the article. And the skin care composition is often heated to a temperature in the range from 50°C to 100°C, more often from 60°C to 90°C, prior to being applied to the article. Once the melted skin care composition has been applied to the article, it is allowed to cool and solidify to form solidified coating or film on the surface of the body contacting surface. Preferably, the application process is designed to aid in the coolinglset up of the skin care composition. Examples of applying the skin care composition to the body contacting surface is described in, e.g., U.S. Patent 5,643,588, "Diaper Having a Lotioned Topsheet", issued to Roe, Bakes & Warner on July 1, 1997, which is incorporated herein by reference.
SPECIFIC ILLUSTRATIONS OF THE PREPARATION OF TREATED ARTICLE
ACCORDING TO THE PRESENT INVENTION
The following examples further describe and demonstrate the preferred embodiments within the scope of the present invention. The examples are given solely for the purpose of illustration, and are not to be construed as limitations of the present invention since many variants thereof are possible without departing from its spirit and scope.
Example 1 A. Preparation of Skin Care Compositions A water free skin care composition (Skin Care Composition A) is made by mixing the following melted components together: Petrolatum made by Witco Corp.
under the name Super White Protopet~, and Behenyl Alcohol made by Henkel WO 00/69484 cA o23~302~ 2ooi-m-o2 pCT/US00/13842 Corp. under the name Lanette 22. Super White Protopet~ is petrolatum. The ratio of the heavy aliphatic hydrocarbons having alkyl chain length of from 27 to 36 to the light hydrocarbons having alkyl chain length of from 17 to 26 is 2.3:1Ø
The ratio of the heavy aliphatic hydrocarbons having alkyl chain length of from 30 to 36 to the light aliphatic hydrocarbons aliphatic having alkyl chain length of from 20 to 26 is 1.7:1Ø The ratio of the heavy aliphatic hydrocarbons having alkyl chain length of from 33 to 36 to the light aliphatic hydrocarbons aliphatic having alkyl chain length of from 23 to 26 is 1.3:1Ø Lanette 22 is a mixed linear C 1 g-C24 primary alcohol. Lanette 22 contains about 70% of C22 fatty alcohol, about 20 % of C20 alcohol, about 9 % of Clg alcohol, and about 1 % of C24 fatty alcohol. The weight percentages of these components are shown in Table I
below:
WO 00/69484 cA o23~302~ 2ooi-m-o2 PCT/US00/13842 Table I
Component Weight Super White Protopet~ 70 Behenyl Alcohol 30 B. Preparation of Skin Care Composition Treated Article by Hot Melt Printing Skin Care Composition A is placed into a heated tank operating at a temperature of 90°C. The composition is subsequently applied with a contact applicator (using a Meltex EP45 hot melt adhesive applicator head operating at a temperature of 90°C) onto all over the DRI-WEAVE topsheet of Whisper Slim Wing Regular Long manufactured by Procter & Gamble Far East, Inc., at an add-on level = 4 g/m2.
Example 2 A. Preparation of Skin Care Compositions A water free skin care composition (Skin Care Composition B) is made by mixing the following melted components together: Petrolatum made by Witco Corp.
under the name Protopet~ 1 S, and Behenyl Alcohol made by Henkel Corp. under the name Lanette 22. Protopet~ 1 S is petrolatum. The ratio of the heavy aliphatic hydrocarbons having alkyl chain length of from 27 to 36 to the light hydrocarbons having . alkyl chain length of from 17 to 26 is 2.3:1Ø The ratio of the heavy aliphatic hydrocarbons having alkyl chain length of from 30 to 36 to the light aliphatic hydrocarbons aliphatic having alkyl chain length of from 20 to 26 is 1.7:1Ø The ratio of the heavy aliphatic hydrocarbons having alkyl chain length of from 33 to 36 to the light aliphatic hydrocarbons aliphatic having alkyl chain length of from 23 to 26 is 1.3:1Ø Lanette 22 contains about 70% of C22 fatty alcohol, about 20 % of C20 alcohol, about 9 % of C 1 g alcohol, and about 1 %
of C24 fatty alcohol. The weight percentages of these components are shown in Table II below:
Table II
WO 00/69484 cA o23~302~ 2ooi-m-o2 PCT/US00/13842 Component Weight Protopet~ 1 S 80 Behenyl Alcohol 20 B. Preparation of Skin Care Composition Treated Article by Hot Melt Spraying Skin Care Composition B is placed into a heated tank operating at a temperature of 90°C. The composition is subsequently sprayed (using a Dynatec E84B1758 spray 5 head, operating at a temperature of 90°C and an atomization pressure of l6kPa) onto the DRI-WEAVE topsheet of Whisper Slim Wing Regular Long manufactured by Procter & Gamble Far East, Inc., in a couple of stripes which are 40mm wide (lateral direction) and 200mm long (longitudinal direction) at an add-on level = 2 g/m2.
10 Example 3 A. Preparation of Skin Care Composition A water free skin care composition (Skin Care Composition C) is made by mixing the following melted components together: Petrolatum made by Witco Corp.
under the name Super White Protopet~, Behenyl Alcohol made by Henkel Corp.
15 under the name Lanette 22, and Steareth-2 made by ICI America under the name Brij 762. Super White Protopet~ is petrolatum. The ratio of the heavy aliphatic hydrocarbons having alkyl chain length of from 27 to 36 to the light hydrocarbons having alkyl chain length of from 17 to 26 is 2.3:1Ø The ratio of the heavy aliphatic hydrocarbons having alkyl chain length of from 30 to 36 to the light 20 aliphatic hydrocarbons aliphatic having alkyl chain length of from 20 to 26 is 1.7:1Ø The ratio of the heavy aliphatic hydrocarbons having alkyl chain length of from 33 to 36 to the light aliphatic hydrocarbons aliphatic having alkyl chain length of from 23 to 26 is 1.3:1Ø Lanette 22 contains about 70% of C22 fatty alcohol, about 20 % of C20 alcohol, about 9 % of C 1 g alcohol, and about 1 %
of 25 C24 fatty alcohol. Brij 762 is a C 1 g linear alcohol ethoxylate having an average degree of ethoxylation of 2. The weight percentages of these components are shown in Table III below:
WO 00/69484 cA o23~302~ 2ooi-m-o2 PCT/US00/13842 Table III
Component Weight Super White Protopet~ 70 Behenyl Alcohol 1 S
Steareth-2 15 B. Preparation of Skin Care Composition Treated Article by Hot Melt Spraying Skin Care Composition C is placed into a heated tank operating at a temperature of 90°C. The composition is subsequently sprayed (using a Dynatec E84B1758 spray head, operating at a temperature of 80°C and an atomization pressure of l6kPa) onto all over the DRI-WEAVE topsheet of Whisper Slim Wing Regular Long manufactured by Procter & Gamble Far East, Inc., at an add-on level = 4 g/m2.
Example 4 A. Preparation of Skin Care Composition A water free skin care composition (Skin Care Compos~~:~,~n D) is made by mixing the following melted components together: Petrolatum made by Witco Corp.
under the name Protopet~ 1 S, Microcrystalline wax made by Witco Corp. under the name Multiwax~ W-835, and Stearyl Alcohol made by the Procter & Gamble Company under the name COl 895. Protopet~ 1 S is petrolatum. The ratio of the heavy aliphatic hydrocarbons having alkyl chain length of from 27 to 36 to the light hydrocarbons having alkyl chain length of from 17 to 26 is 2.3:1Ø The ratio of the heavy aliphatic hydrocarbons having alkyl chain length of from 30 to 36 to the light aliphatic hydrocarbons aliphatic having alkyl chain length of from 20 to 26 is 1.7:1Ø The ratio of the heavy aliphatic hydrocarbons having alkyl chain length of from 33 to 36 to the light aliphatic hydrocarbons aliphatic having alkyl chain length of from 23 to 26 is 1.3:1Ø Multiwax~ W-835 is microcrystalline wax having a consistency of from 60 to 80 at 25°C measured under ASTM D-1321. C01895 is a linear C 1 g primary alcohol. The weight percentages of these components are shown in Table IV below:
WO 00/69484 cA o23~302~ 2ooi-ii-o2 pCT/US00/13842 Table IV
Component Weight Protopet~ 1 S 70 Microcrystalline Wax 10 Stearyl Alcohol 20 B. Preparation of Skin Care Composition Treated Article by Hot Melt S~rayy Skin Care Composition D is placed into a heated tank operating at a temperature of 90°C. The composition is subsequently sprayed (using a Dynatec spray head, operating at a temperature of 90°C and an atomization pressure of l6kPa) onto the DRI-WEAVE topsheet of Whisper Slim Wing Regular Long manufactured by Procter & Gamble Far East, Inc., in a couple of stripes which is 40mm wide (lateral direction) and 200mm long (longitudinal direction) in an add-on level = 4 g/m2.
Example 5 A. Preparation of Skin Care Composition A water free skin care composition (Skin Care Composition E) is made by mixing the following melted components together: Petrolatum made by Witco Corp.
under the name Protopet~ 1 S, Polyethylene wax made by Witco Corp. under the name Performalene 400~, and Stearyl Alcohol made by the Procter & Gamble Company under the name C01895. Protopet~ 1 S is petrolatum. The ratio of the heavy aliphatic hydrocarbons having alkyl chain length of from 27 to 36 to the light hydrocarbons having alkyl chain length of from 17 to 26 is 2.3:1Ø The ratio of the heavy aliphatic hydrocarbons having alkyl chain length of from 30 to 36 to the light aliphatic hydrocarbons aliphatic having alkyl chain length of from 20 to 26 is 1.7:1Ø The ratio of the heavy aliphatic hydrocarbons having alkyl chain length of from 33 to 36 to the light aliphatic hydrocarbons aliphatic having alkyl chain length of from 23 to 26 is 1.3:1Ø Performalene 400~ is polyethylene wax WO 00/69484 cA o23~302~ 2ooi-ii-o2 pCT/US00/13842 having an average molecular weight of 400. C01895 is a linear Clg primary alcohol. The weight percentages of these components are shown in Table V
below:
Table V
Component Weight Protopet~ 1 S 70 Polyethylene wax 10 Stearyl Alcohol 20 B. Preparation of Skin Care Composition Treated Article by Hot Melt Spraying Skin Care Composition E is placed into a heated tank operating at a temperature of 90°C. The composition is subsequently applied with a contact applicator (using a Meltex EP45 hot melt adhesive applicator head operating at a temperature of 90°C) onto all over the DRI-WEAVE topsheet of Whisper Slim Wing Regular Long manufactured by Procter & Gamble Far East, Inc., at an add-on level = 4 g/m2.
Example 6 A. Preparation of Skin Care Composition A water free skin care composition (Skin Care Composition F) is made by mixing Fumed Silica made by Degussa AG under the name Aerosil 8972 with the following melted components; Petrolatum made by Witco Corp. under the name Super White Protopet~, and Behenyl Alcohol made by Henkel Corp. under the name Lanette 22. These are mixed by a high speed blade mixer (Tokusyu Kika TK Robo Mics, operating at SOOOrpm). Super White Protopet~ is petrolatum.
The ratio of the heavy aliphatic hydrocarbons having alkyl chain length of from 27 to 36 to the light hydrocarbons having alkyl chain length of from 17 to 26 is 2.3:1Ø The ratio of the heavy aliphatic hydrocarbons having alkyl chain length of from 30 to 36 to the light aliphatic hydrocarbons aliphatic having alkyl chain length of from 20 to 26 is 1.7:1Ø The ratio of the heavy aliphatic hydrocarbons WO 00/69484 cA o23~302~ 2ooi-m-o2 PCT/US00/13842 having alkyl chain length of from 33 to 36 to the light aliphatic hydrocarbons aliphatic having alkyl chain length of from 23 to 26 is 1.3:1Ø Lunette 22 contains about 70% of C22 fatty alcohol, about 20 % of C20 alcohol, about 9 % of C 1 g alcohol, and about 1 % of C24 fatty alcohol. Aerosil 8972 is fumed silica surface-treated by dimethylsilicone and has an average diameter of less than 1 Vim.
The weight percentages of these components are shown in Table VI below:
Table VI
Component Weight Super White Protopet~70 Behenyl Alcohol 20 Fumed Silica 10 B. Pr~aration of Skin Care Composition Treated Article by Hot Melt Printing Skin Care Composition F is placed into a heated tank operating at a temperature of 90°C. The composition is subsequently applied with a contact applicator (using a Meltex EP45 hot melt adhesive applicator head operating at a temperature of 90°C) onto all over the DRI-WEAVE topsheet of Whisper Slim Wing Regular Long manufactured by Procter & Gamble Far East, Inc., at an add-on level = 4 g/m2.
Example 7 A. Preparation of Skin Care Composition A water free skin care composition (Skin Care Composition G) is made by mixing Bentonite Clay made by Rheox Inc. under the name Bentone 38 with the following melted components; Petrolatum made by Witco Corp. under the name Protopet~
1 S, and Behenyl Alcohol made by Henkel Corp. under the name Lunette 22.
These are mixed by a high speed blade mixer (Tokusyu Kika TK Robo Mics, operating at SOOOrpm). Protopet~1S is petrolatum. The ratio of the heavy aliphatic hydrocarbons having alkyl chain length of from 27 to 36 to the light hydrocarbons having alkyl chain length of from 17 to 26 is 2.3:1Ø The ratio of WO 00/69484 cA o23~302~ 2ooi-ii-o2 pCT/US00/13842 the heavy aliphatic hydrocarbons having alkyl chain length of from 30 to 36 to the light aliphatic hydrocarbons aliphatic having alkyl chain length of from 20 to 26 is 1.7:1Ø The ratio of the heavy aliphatic hydrocarbons having alkyl chain length of from 33 to 36 to the light aliphatic hydrocarbons aliphatic having alkyl chain 5 length of from 23 to 26 is 1.3:1Ø Lanette 22 contains about 70% of C22 fatty alcohol, about 20 % of C20 alcohol, about 9 % of C 1 g alcohol, and about 1 %
of C24 fatty alcohol. Bentone 38 is bentonite clay surface-treated by ammonium salt and has an average diameter of less than 5pm. The weight percentages of these components are shown in Table VII below:
10 Table VII
Component Weight Protopet~ 1 S 70 Behenyl Alcohol 20 Bentone 10 B. Preparation of Skin Care Composition Treated Article byHot Melt Printing Skin Care Composition G is placed into a heated tank operating at a temperature of 90°C. The composition is subsequently applied with a contact applicator (using 15 a Meltex EP45 hot melt adhesive applicator head operating at a temperature of 90°C) onto all over the DRI-WEAVE topsheet of Whisper Slim Wing Regular Long manufactured by Procter & Gamble Far East, Inc., at an add-on level = 4 g/m2.
Example 8 20 A. Preparation of Skin Care Compositions A water free skin care composition (Skin Care Composition H) is made by mixing zinc oxide made by Zinc Corporation of America under the name USP-1 with mineral oil made by Shell Co. under the name of Kaydol as a pre-dispersion solvent for zinc oxide, polyglyceryl-6 polyricinoleate made by Nikko Chemicals Co. Ltd. under the name 25 Hexaglyn PR15 as a dispersing agent for zinc oxide and the following melted WO 00/69484 cA o23~302~ 2ooi-m-o2 PCT/US00/13842 components; Petrolatum made by Witco Corp. under the name Super White Protopet~, and Behenyl Alcohol made by Henkel Corp. under the name Lunette 22. These are mixed by a high speed blade mixer (Tokusyu Kika TK Robo Mics, operating at SOOOrpm) at 90°C. Super White Protopet~ is petrolatum. The ratio of the heavy aliphatic hydrocarbons having alkyl chain length of from 27 to 36 to the light hydrocarbons having alkyl chain length of from 17 to 26 is 2.3:1Ø The ratio of the heavy aliphatic hydrocarbons having alkyl chain length of from 30 to 36 to the light aliphatic hydrocarbons aliphatic having alkyl chain length of from 20 to 26 is 1.7:1Ø
The ratio of the heavy aliphatic hydrocarbons having alkyl chain length of from 33 to 36 to the light aliphatic hydrocarbons aliphatic having alkyl chain length of from 23 to 26 is 1.3:1Ø Lunette 22 contains about 70% of C22 fatty alcohol, about 20 % of alcohol, about 9 % of C 1 g alcohol, and about 1 % of C24 fatty alcohol. USP-1 is zinc oxide having an average particle diameter of about 0.1-1.0 pm. The weight percentages of the components are shown in Table VIII below:
Table VIII
Component Weight Super White Protopet~ 67 Behenyl Alcohol 30 Zinc Oxide 2.0 Mineral Oil 0.7 Hexaglyn PR15 0.3 B. Preparation of Skin Care Composition Treated Article by Hot Melt Printing Skin Care Composition H is placed into a heated tank operating at a temperature of 90°C. The composition is subsequently applied with a contact applicator (using a Meltex EP45 hot melt adhesive applicator head operating at a temperature of 90°C) onto all over the DRI-WEAVE topsheet of Whisper Slim Wing Regular Long manufactured by Procter & Gamble Far East, Inc., at an add-on level = 4 g/m2.
WO 00/69484 cA o23~302~ 2ooi-ii-o2 pCT/US00/13842 Example 9 A. Preparation of Skin Care Composition A water free skin care composition (Skin Care Composition n is made by mixing zinc oxide made by Zinc Corporation of America under the name USP-1 with mineral oil made by Shell Co. under the name of Kaydol as a pre-dispersion solvent for zinc oxide, diethanolamine polyoxyethylene oleyl ether phosphate made by Croda Inc. under the name Crodafos N3N as a dispersing agent for zinc oxide and the following melted components; Petrolatum made by Witco Corp. under the name Protopet~ 1 S, and Behenyl Alcohol made by Henkel Corp. under the name Lanette 22. These are mixed by a high speed blade mixer (Tokusyu Kika TK Robo Mics, operating at SOOOrpm) at 90°C. Protopet~ 1 S is petrolatum. The ratio of the heavy aliphatic hydrocarbons having alkyl chain length of from 27 to 36 to the light hydrocarbons having alkyl chain length of from 17 to 26 is 2.3:1Ø The ratio of the heavy aliphatic hydrocarbons having alkyl chain length of from 30 to 36 to the light aliphatic hydrocarbons aliphatic having alkyl chain length of from 20 to 26 is 1.7:1Ø The ratio of the heavy aliphatic hydrocarbons having alkyl chain length of from 33 to 36 to the light aliphatic hydrocarbons aliphatic having alkyl chain length of from 23 to 26 is 1.3:1Ø Lanette 22 contains about 70% of C22 fatty alcohol, about 20 % of C20 alcohol, about 9 % of Clg alcohol, and about 1 of C24 fatty alcohol. . USP-1 is zinc oxide having an average particle diameter of about 0.1-1.0 Vim. The weight percentages of the components are shown in Table IX
below:
WO 00/69484 cA o23~302~ 2ooi-ii-o2 pCT/US00/13842 Table IX
Component Weight Protopet~ 1 S 65 Behenyl Alcohol 30 Zinc Oxide 3.0 Mineral Oil 1.0 Crodafos N3N 1.0 B. Preparation of Skin Care Composition Treated Article by Hot Melt Printing Skin Care Composition I is placed into a heated tank operating at a temperature of 90°C. The composition is subsequently applied with a contact applicator (using a Meltex EP45 hot melt adhesive applicator head operating at a temperature of 90°C) onto all over the DRI-WEAVE topsheet of Whisper Slim Wing Regular Long manufactured by Procter & Gamble Far East, Inc., at an add-on level = 3 g/m2.
Example 10 A. Preparation of Skin Care Composition A water free skin care composition (Skin Care Composition J) is made by mixing zinc oxide made by Zinc Corporation of America under the name USP-1 with mineral oil made by Shell Co. under the name of Kaydol as a pre-dispersion solvent for zinc oxide, polyhydroxystearic acid made by ICI Inc. under the name Arlacel P 100 as a dispersing agent for zinc oxide and the following melted components; Petrolatum made by Witco Corp. under the name Super White Protopet~, Behenyl Alcohol made by Henkel Corp.
under the name Lanette 22, and Steareth-2 made by ICI America under the name Brij 762. These are mixed by a high speed blade mixer (Tokusyu Kika TK Robo Mics, operating at SOOOrpm) at 90°C. Super White Protopet~ is petrolatum. The ratio of the heavy aliphatic hydrocarbons having alkyl chain length of from 27 to 36 to the light hydrocarbons having alkyl chain length of from 17 to 26 is 2.3:1Ø The ratio of the WO 00/69484 cA o23~302~ 2ooi-m-o2 PCT/US00/13842 heavy aliphatic hydrocarbons having alkyl chain length of from 30 to 36 to the light aliphatic hydrocarbons aliphatic having alkyl chain length of from 20 to 26 is 1.7:1Ø
The ratio of the heavy aliphatic hydrocarbons having alkyl chain length of from 33 to 36 to the light aliphatic hydrocarbons aliphatic having alkyl chain length of from 23 to 26 is 1.3:1Ø Lanette 22 contains about 70% of C22 fatty alcohol, about 20 % of alcohol, about 9 % of Clg alcohol, and about 1 % of C24 fatty alcohol. Brij 762 is a Clg linear alcohol ethoxylate having an average degree of ethoxylation of 2. .
USP-1 is zinc oxide having an average particle diameter of about 0.1-1.0 Vim. The weight percentages of the components are shown in Table X below:
Table X
Component Weight Super White Protopet~65 Behenyl Alcohol 25 Steareth-2 5.0 Zinc Oxide 3.0 Mineral Oil 1.0 Arlacel P 100 1.0 B. Preparation of Skin Care Composition Treated Article by Hot Melt Spraying Skin Care Composition J is placed into a heated tank operating at a temperature of 90°C. The composition is subsequently sprayed (using a Dynatec E84B1758 spray head, operating at a temperature of 80°C and an atomization pressure of l6kPa) onto all over the DRI-WEAVE topsheet of Whisper Slim Wing Regular Long manufactured by Procter & Gamble Far East, Inc., at an add-on level = 5 g/m2.
Example 11 A. Preparation of Skin Care Composition WO 00/69484 cA o23~302~ 2ooi-ii-o2 PCT/US00/13842 A water free skin care composition (Skin Care Composition K) is made by mixing zinc oxide made by Zinc Corporation of America under the name USP-1 with mineral oil made by Shell Co. under the name of Kaydol as a pre-dispersion solvent for zinc oxide, propylene glycol dicaprate made by Abitec Performance Products under the name 5 Captex 100 as a dispersing agent for zinc oxide and the following melted components;
Petrolatum made by Witco Corp. under the name Protopet~ 1 S, Behenyl Alcohol made by Henkel Corp. under the name Lanette 22, and Microcrystalline wax made by Witco Corp. under the name Multiwax~ W-835. These are mixed by a high speed blade mixer (Tokusyu Kika TK Robo Mics, operating at SOOOrpm) at 90°C.
Protopet~ 1 S is 1'0 petrolatum. The ratio of the heavy aliphatic hydrocarbons having alkyl chain length of from 27 to 36 to the light hydrocarbons having alkyl chain length of from 17 to 26 is 2.3:1Ø The ratio of the heavy aliphatic hydrocarbons having alkyl chain length of from 30 to 36 to the light aliphatic hydrocarbons aliphatic having alkyl chain length of from 20 to 26 is 1.7:1Ø The ratio of the heavy aliphatic hydrocarbons having alkyl chain 15 length of from 33 to 36 to the light aliphatic hydrocarbons aliphatic having alkyl chain length of from 23 to 26 is 1.3:1Ø Lanette 22 contains about 70% of C22 fatty alcohol, about 20 % of C20 alcohol, about 9 % of C 1 g alcohol, and about 1 % of C24 fatty alcohol. Multiwax~ W-835 is microcrystalline wax having a consistency of from 60 to 80 at 25°C measured under ASTM D-1321. . USP-1 is zinc oxide having an average 20 particle diameter of about 0.1-1.0 pm. The weight percentages of the components are shown in Table XI below:
WO 00/69484 cA o23~302~ 2ooi-m-o2 PCT/US00/13842 Table XI
Component Weight Protopet~ 1 S 57 Behenyl Alcohol 30 Microcrystalline Wax 5.0 Zinc Oxide 5.0 Mineral Oil 2.0 Captex 100 1.0 B. Preparation of Skin Care Composition Treated Article by Hot Melt Spraying Skin Care Composition K is placed into a heated tank operating at a temperature of 90°C. The composition is subsequently sprayed (using a Dynatec spray head, operating at a temperature of 90°C and an atomization pressure of l6kPa) onto the DRI-WEAVE topsheet of Whisper Slim Wing Regular Long manufactured by Procter & Gamble Far East, Inc., in a couple of stripes which is 40mm wide (lateral direction) and 200mm long (longitudinal direction) in an add on level = 4 g/m2.
Example 12 A. Preparation of Skin Care Composition A water free skin care composition (Skin Care Composition L) is made by mixing zinc oxide made by Zinc Corporation of America under the name USP-1 with mineral oil made by Shell Co. under the name of Kaydol as a pre-dispersion solvent for zinc oxide, propylene glycol dicaprate made by Abitec Performance Products under the name Captex 100 as a dispersing agent for zinc oxide and the following melted components;
Petrolatum made by Witco Corp. under the name Super White Protopet~ , Behenyl Alcohol made by Henkel Corp. under the name Lanette 22, Stearyl Alcohol made by Procter and Gamble Company under the name C01895, and Microcrystalline wax made WO 00/69484 cA o23~302~ 2ooi-ii-o2 PCT/LTS00/13842 by Witco Corp. under the name Multiwax~ W-835. These are mixed by a high speed blade mixer (Tokusyu Kika TK Robo Mics, operating at SOOOrpm) at 90°C.
Super White Protopet~ is petrolatum. The ratio of the heavy aliphatic hydrocarbons having alkyl chain length of from 27 to 36 to the light hydrocarbons having alkyl chain length of from 17 to 26 is 2.3:1Ø The ratio of the heavy aliphatic hydrocarbons having alkyl chain length of from 30 to 36 to the light aliphatic hydrocarbons aliphatic having alkyl chain length of from 20 to 26 is 1.7:1Ø The ratio of the heavy aliphatic hydrocarbons having alkyl chain length of from 33 to 36 to the light aliphatic hydrocarbons aliphatic having alkyl chain length of from 23 to 26 is 1.3:1Ø C01895 is a linear Clg primary alcohol. Multiwax~ W-835 is microcrystalline wax having a consistency of from 60 to 80 at 25°C measured under ASTM D-1321. . USP-1 is zinc oxide having an average particle diameter of about 0.1-1.0 Vim. The weight percentages of the components are shown in Table XII below:
WO 00/69484 cA o23~302~ 2ooi-m-o2 PCT/US00/13842 Table XII
Component Weight Super White Protopet~ 48 Behenyl Alcohol 25 Stearyl Alcohol 10 Microcrystalline Wax 10 Zinc Oxide 4.0 Mineral Oil 1.0 Captex 100 2.0 B. Preparation of Skin Care Composition Treated Article by Hot Melt Printing Skin Care Composition L is placed into a heated tank operating at a temperature of 90°C. The composition is subsequently applied with a contact applicator (using a Meltex EP45 hot melt adhesive applicator head opers~vng at a temperature of 90°C) onto all over the DRI-WEAVE topsheet of Whisper Slim Wing Regular Long manufactured by Procter & Gamble Far East, Inc., at an add-on level = 6 g/m2.
It -should also be understood that all of the limits and ranges specified herein include all narrower ranges, limits, and amounts that are within the specified limits and ranges and that such narrower ranges and limits may be claimed even though those limits and ranges are not separately listed.
While particular embodiments of the present invention have been illustrated and described, it would be obvious to those skilled in the art that various other changes and modifications can be made without departing from the spirit and scope of the invention.
TECHNICAL FIELD
This application relates to absorbent articles including, but not limited to, feminine hygiene garments such as sanitary napkins and panti-liners, diapers, training pants, adult incontinence devices, diaper holders, and the like. More particularly, the present invention relates to absorbent articles having a skin care composition coating on the body contacting surface of the absorbent article that is transferable to the wearer's skin.
BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION
All manner and variety of absorbent articles configured for the absorption of body fluids such as menses, urine and feces are, of course, well known. With respect to feminine protection devices, the art has offered two basic types; sanitary napkins have been developed for external wear about the pudendal region while tampons have been developed for internal wear within the vaginal cavity for interruption of menstrual flow therefrom. Such tampon devices are disclosed in U.S. Patent No. 4,412,833, entitled "Tampon Applicator", issued to Weigner, et al. on November 1, 1983, and U.S.
Patent WO 00/69484 cA o23~302~ 2ooi-m-o2 PCT/US00/13842 No. 4,413,986, entitled "Tampon Assembly With Means For Sterile Insertion", issued to Jacobs on November 8, 1983.
Hybrid devices which attempt to merge the structural features of the sanitary napkins and the tampons into a single device have also been proposed. Such hybrid devices are disclosed in U.S. Patent No. 2,092,346, entitled "Catamenial Pad", issued to Arone on September 7, 1937, and U.S. Patent No. 3,905,372, entitled "Feminine Hygiene Protective Shield", issued to Denkinger on September 16, 1975. Other less intrusive hybrid devices are known as labial or interlabial sanitary napkins and are characterized by having a portion which at least partially resides within the wearer's vestibule and a portion which at least partially resides external of the wearer's vestibule. Such devices are disclosed in U.S. Patent No. 2,662,527, entitled "Sanitary Pad", issued to Jacks on December 15, 1953, and U.S. Patent No. 4,631,062, entitled "Labial Sanitary Pad", issued to Lassen, et al. on December 23, 1986. Interlabial pads have the potential to provide even greater freedom from inconvenience because of their small size and reduced risk of leakage. Numerous attempts have been made in the past to produce an interlabial pad which would combine the best features of tampons and sanitary napkins while avoiding at least some of the disadvantages associated with each of these types of devices. Examples of such devices are described in U.S. Patent 2,917,049 issued to Delaney on December 15, 1959, U.S. Patent 3,420,235 issued to Harmon on January 7, 1969, U.S.
Patent 4,595,392 issued to Johnson, et al. on June 17, 1986, and U.S. Patent 5,484,429 issued to Vukos, et al. on January 16, 1996. A commercially available interlabial device is FRESH
'N FIT~ PADETTE interlabial product which is marketed by Athena Medical Corp.
of Portland, OR and described in U.S. Patents 3,983,873 and 4,175,561 issued to Hirschman on October 5, 1976 and November 27, 1979, respectively.
Although these products such as sanitary napkins, tampons and interlabial pads are effective generally to absorb menses, there are still discomfort which need to be solved.
For example, the wearer feels uncomfortable due to; (1) frictional discomfort associated with rubbing of the product against the wearer's skin while wearing/applying the product;
(2) adherence of the menses discharged onto the topsheet to the wearer's skin;
and (3) adherence of the surface of the product such as a topsheet to the wearer's skin. The friction when applying the product prevents the product from being properly inserted/applied, leading to discomfort. In addition, rubbing of the product against the wearer's skin causes itch and/or skin irntation. The adherence of the menses gives the wearer messy/dirty feeling. In addition, enzyme and/or microbial contained in the adhered menses attack the wearer's skin, thereby causing itch and/or skin irritation. The WO 00/69484 cA o23~302~ 2ooi-m-o2 PCT/CTS00/13842 adherence of the topsheet gives the wearer sticky feeling. It also hinders the wearer's skin from air circulation, thereby causing skin overhydration.
European Patent Application EP 0 692 263 A2, "Method of reducing the coefficient of friction of absorbent products and wax coated products produced thereby", is directed to lubricated absorbent products having a coating of a small amount of high molecular weight solid waxy substance which has a softening point above body temperature. However, there are drawbacks associated with the use of high molecular weight materials for this purpose. High molecular weight materials will not be as soothing or lotion-like to the wearer's skin as lower molecular weight materials. In addition, high molecular weight materials will not be capable of transfernng to the wearer's skin to provide skin care benefits. High molecular weight waxes can also become brittle and tend to flake or chip off an absorbent article due to their lack of flexibility if the absorbent article is of a type that is required to flex and bend. Further, if the softening point of such materials is higher than room temperature, application of such materials to an absorbent article will be more difficult, and will require that the material be heated in order to coat an absorbent article with such a material.
The problem of drying of a female wearer's labial vestibule area has been discussed in the patent literature. For example, U.S. Patent 4,846,824 issued to Lassen, et al. on July 11, 1989, is directed to a labial sanitary pad that has a "physiologically hydrous" cover (that is, a cover material supposedly designed to "maintain a moist interface between the tissues of the vestibule and the pad"). Types of cover materials specified in the Lassen, et al. patent include a spunlaced polyester fiber nonwoven and a rayon cover. The Lassen, et al. patent states that the covers can be provided with various "coatings" to maintain the physiologically hydrous feature, but no specific coatings appear to be disclosed.
Other types of absorbent articles are e.g., disposable diapers and incontinent briefs or undergarments to absorb and contain body exudates. Such articles are thus intended to prevent body exudates from soiling, wetting, or otherwise contaminating clothing or other articles, such as bedding, that come in contact with the wearer. The most common mode of failure for such products occurs when body exudates leak out of the gaps between the article and the wearer's legs or waist to adjacent clothing because they are not immediately absorbed within the article and the absorbent article is not able to sustain a good fit on the wearer such that gaps are created allowing the exudates to leak out of the article. For example, urine tends to be deposited onto the topsheet in gushes such that the urine 4 cA o23~302~ 2ooi-ii-o2 pCT/US00/13842 migrates to the gaps between the article and the wearer where it can come in contact with clothing or other articles and be absorbed by these articles. Additionally, loose fecal material that is not easily absorbed by the absorbent article tends to "float"
on the body contacting surface and work its way past the gaps between the article and the legs or waist of the wearer.
Contemporary disposable diapers have a topsheet, a backsheet, an absorbent core, and one or more cuffs, typically elastic cuffs, positioned to contact the legs and/or waist of the wearer. These elastic cuffs prove effective generally to prevent wicking and overflow from the fluid laden diaper to clothing contacting the edges of the diaper in that the elastic cuffs present a barrier between the edge of the diaper and the contacting clothing, and generally in addition, provide a gasketing action about the legs or waist of the wearer to maintain a seal about the leg or waist and minimize gapping. However, because the forces generated by the elastic members are concentrated along a narrow area resulting in high localized pressures, such elastic cuffs have an increased tendency to indent and mark the skin of the wearer. These skin effects are particularly acute for products worn by infants and incontinent elderly adults due to the tenderness of their skin and its sensitivity to even slight pressures or rubbing actions. These skin effects are even further acute due to the occlusion of the skin caused by such products. The occlusion of the skin by the diaper can potentially lead to skin overhydration. As a result, overhydrated skin is more susceptible to damage from abrasion due to rubbing caused by normal wearer movements and contact with the elastic cuffs. It is also generally known that overhydrated skin is more susceptible to skin disorders, including diaper rash, erythema, heat rash, abrasion, pressure marks, and skin burner loss. The reduced barrier efficiency of abraded, overhydrated skin can further cause an increase in diaper rash. (21 C.F.R.
333.503 defines diaper rash as "[a]n inflammatory skin condition in the diaper area (perineum, buttocks, lower abdomen, and inner thighs) caused by one or more of the following factors: moisture, occlusion, chafing, continued contact with urine or feces or both, or mechanical or chemical irritation.") To address the concerns of skin disorders associated with wearing diapers and other absorbent articles, the caregiver or wearer often applies skin protective and/or therapeutic products to the buttocks, genitals, anal and/or other regions before placing the absorbent article on the wearer. This procedure usually involves the caregiver applying the skin protective product to their hands, and then wiping the same on the skin of the wearer. To eliminate the need for this wasteful, messy, time consuming, and easily forgotten procedure, there have been attempts to prepare absorbent articles which contain a skin care substance on the article's topsheet.
WO 00/69484 cA o23~302~ 2ooi-ii-o2 pCT/US00/13842 For example, one substance that has been applied to diaper products to impart a soothing, protective coating is mineral oil. Mineral oil is a mixture of various liquid hydrocarbons obtained by distilling the high-boiling (i.e., 300°-390°C) fractions in petroleum. Mineral oil is liquid at ambient temperatures, e.g. 20°-25°C. As a result, 5 mineral oil is relatively fluid and mobile when applied to diapers. Because mineral oil is fluid and mobile at ambient temperatures, it tends not to remain localized on the surface ' of the diaper, but instead migrates into the interior of the diaper.
Accordingly, relatively high levels of mineral oil need to be applied to the diaper to provide the desired therapeutic or protective coating benefits. This leads not only to increased costs for these treated diaper products, but other detrimental effects as well, including decreased absorbency of the underlying absorbent core.
Even without increasing its level, the tendency of mineral oil to migrate once applied has other detrimental effects. For example, the applied mineral oil can transfer to, into and through the packaging or wrapper material for the treated diaper product. This can create the need for barrier-type packaging or wrapper films to avoid smearing or other leakage of mineral oil from the diaper product.
Thus, it would be desirable to provide an absorbent article having a body contacting surface wherein a skin care composition is disposed thereon to provide improved skin care benefits, particularly in skin regions in contact with the wearer during use. The skin care composition is preferably as stable as possible before use of the absorbent article such that the skin care composition remains on the body contacting surface of the absorbent article. It is also preferable that, once the absorbent article is applied to the wearer's body, the skin care composition is easily transferable to the wearer's skin to provide these skin benefits.
Thus, there is a need for an absorbent article having a body contacting surface with a skin care composition disposed thereon that: (1) provides skin benefits; and (2) is as stable as possible before use of the absorbent article while transferable to the wearer's skin once the absorbent article is applied to the wearer's body.
SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION
The present invention relates to an absorbent article comprising a body contacting surface and an absorbent core. At least a portion of the body contacting surface comprises an effective amount of a skin care composition which is solid or semisolid at WO 00/69484 cA o23~302~ 2ooi-m-o2 PCT/LTS00/13842 40°C and which is transferable from the body contacting surface to the wearer's skin by contact, normal wearer motion and body heat at a level effective in providing a skin benefit to the wearer's skin. The skin care composition has viscosity of more than about 105 Poise under shear stress of less than about 3X104 dynes/cm2, and viscosity of less than about 102 Poise under shear stress of more than about 106 dynes/cm2, at 40°C.
The present invention also relates to an absorbent article comprising a body contacting surface and an absorbent core. At least a portion of the body contacting surface comprises an effective amount of a skin care composition which is solid or semisolid at 40°C and which is transferable from the body contacting surface to the wearer's skin by contact, normal wearer motion and body heat at a level effective in providing a skin benefit to the wearer's skin. The skin care composition comprises a skin care active ingredient. The skin care composition has viscosity of more than about 105 Poise under shear stress of less than about 3X104 dynes/cm2, and viscosity of less than about 102 Poise under shear stress of more than about 106 dynes/cm2, at 40°C.
BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS
While the specification concludes with claims particularly pointing out and distinctly claiming the subject matter which is regarded as forming the present invention, it is believed that the invention will be better understood from the following description which is taken in conjunction with the accompanying drawings in which:
FIG. 1 is an absorbent article in the form of a sanitary napkin according to the present invention;
FIG. 2 is a lateral cross-sectional view taken along line 2-2 of the sanitary napkin shown in FIG. 1;
FIG. 3 is a lateral cross-sectional view taken along line 3-3 of FIG. 1 through the center portion of one of the flaps;
FIG. 4 is a top plan view of the absorbent article shown in FIG. 1 with showing areas applied skin care composition; and FIG. 5 is a graph of shear stress vs. viscosity of one example of skin care composition.
WO 00/69484 cA o23~302~ 2ooi-m-o2 PCT/US00/13842 DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION
All cited references are incorporated herein by reference in their entireties.
Citation of any reference is not an admission regarding any determination as to its availability as prior art to the claimed invention.
"Comprising" means that other steps and other elements which do not affect the end result can be added. This term encompasses the terms "consisting of" and "consisting essentially of '.
All percentages, ratios and proportions used herein are by weight unless otherwise specified.
A. Absorbent Article Herein "absorbent article" refers to devices which absorb and contain body exudates, and more specifically, refers to devices which are placed against the skin of a wearer to absorb and contain the various exudates discharged from the body.
Herein "disposable" is used to describe absorbent articles which are not intended to be laundered or otherwise restored or reused as an absorbent article after a single use.
Examples of disposable absorbent articles include feminine hygiene garments such as sanitary napkins and panti-liners, diapers, incontinence briefs, diaper holders, training pants, and the like.
Disposable absorbent articles typically comprise a liquid pervious topsheet, a liquid impervious backsheet joined to the topsheet and an absorbent core positioned between the topsheet and the backsheet. Disposable absorbent articles and components thereof, including the topsheet, backsheet, absorbent core, and any individual layers of these components, have a body surface and a garment surface. Herein "body surface"
means that surface of the article or component which is intended to be worn toward or adjacent to the body of the wearer, while the "garment surface" is on the opposite side and is intended to be worn toward or placed adjacent to the wearer's body or undergarments when the disposable absorbent article is worn.
As used herein, the term "body contacting surface" of an absorbent article is one or more surfaces of any article components that contact the wearer at some time during the wear period. Body contacting surfaces include, but are not limited to, portions of the topsheet, flaps, leg cuffs, waist region, side panels, fastening tabs, etc., which contact a wearer during use.
WO 00/69484 cA o23~302~ 2ooi-m-o2 PCT/US00/13842 The following description generally discusses the absorbent core, topsheet, and backsheet materials that are useful in disposable absorbent articles, though disposable absorbent article does not necessarily need to have all of them. It is to be understood that this general description applies to these components of the specific absorbent articles shown in FIGS. 1-3 and further described below, in addition to those of other disposable absorbent articles which are generally described herein.
In general, the absorbent core is capable of absorbing or retaining liquids (e.g., menses, urine, and/or other body exudates). The absorbent core is preferably compressible, conformable, and non-irntating to the wearer's skin. The absorbent core may be manufactured in a wide variety of sizes and shapes (e.g., rectangular, oval, hourglass, "T" shaped, dog bone, asymmetric, etc.). The absorbent core may include any of a wide variety of liquid-absorbent materials commonly used in absorbent articles, such as comminuted wood pulp, which is generally referred to as airfelt. Examples of other suitable absorbent materials for use in the absorbent core include creped cellulose wadding; meltblown polymers including coform; chemically stiffened, modified or cross-linked cellulosic fibers; synthetic fibers such as crimped polyester fibers;
peat moss; tissue including tissue wraps and tissue laminates; absorbent foams; absorbent sponges;
superabsorbent polymers; absorbent gelling materials; or any equivalent material or combinations of materials, or mixtures of these.
The configuration and construction of the absorbent core may also be varied (e.g., the absorbent core may have varying caliper zones and/or have a profile so as to be thicker in the center; hydrophilic gradients; gradients of the absorbent composite, superabsorbent gradients; or lower average density and lower average basis weight zones, e.g., acquisition zones; or may comprise one or more layers or structures). The total absorbent capacity of the absorbent core should, however, be compatible with the design loading and the intended use of the absorbent article. Further, the size and absorbent capacity of the absorbent core may be varied to accommodate different uses such as diapers, incontinence pads, pantiliners, regular sanitary napkins, and overnight sanitary napkins, and to accommodate wearers ranging from infants to adults.
The absorbent core can include other absorbent components that are often used in absorbent articles, for example, a dusting layer, a wicking or acquisition layer, or a secondary topsheet for increasing the wearer's comfort.
The topsheet is preferably compliant, soft feeling, and non-irritating to the wearer's skin. Further, the topsheet is liquid pervious, permitting liquids (e.g., menses WO 00/69484 cA o23~302~ 2ooi-m-o2 PCT/US00/13842 and/or urine) to readily penetrate through its thickness. A suitable topsheet may be manufactured from a wide range of materials such as woven and nonwoven materials (e.g., a nonwoven web of fibers); polymeric materials such as apertured formed thermoplastic films, apertured plastic films, and hydroformed thermoplastic films; porous foams; reticulated foams; reticulated thermoplastic films; and thermoplastic scrims.
Suitable woven and nonwoven materials can be comprised of natural fibers (e.g., wood or cotton fibers), synthetic fibers (e.g., polymeric fibers such as polyester, polypropylene, or polyethylene fibers) or from a combination of natural and synthetic fibers.
When the topsheet comprises a nonwoven web, the web may be manufactured by a wide number of known techniques. For example, the web may be spunbonded, carded, wet-laid, melt-blown, hydroentangled, combinations of the above, or the like.
The backsheet is impervious to liquids (e.g., menses and/or urine) and is preferably manufactured from a thin plastic film, although other flexible liquid impervious materials may also be used. Herein "flexible" refers to materials which are compliant and will readily conform to the general shape and contours of the human body.
The backsheet prevents the exudates absorbed and contained in the absorbent core from wetting articles which contact the absorbent article such as bedsheets, pants, pajamas and undergarments. The backsheet may thus comprise a woven or nonwoven material, polymeric films such as thermoplastic films of polyethylene or polypropylene, or composite materials such as a film-coated nonwoven material. A suitable backsheet is a polyethylene film having a thickness of from about 0.012 mm (0.5 mil) to about 0.051 mm (2.0 mils). Exemplary polyethylene films are manufactured by Clopay Corporation of Cincinnati, Ohio, under the designation P18-1401 and by Tredegar Film Products of Terre Haute, Indiana, under the designation XP-39385. The backsheet may be embossed and/or matte finished to provide a more clothlike appearance. Further, the backsheet may permit vapors to escape from the absorbent core (i.e., the backsheet is breathable) while still preventing exudates from passing through the backsheet. The size of the backsheet is dictated by the size of the absorbent core and the exact absorbent article design selected.
The backsheet and the topsheet are positioned adjacent the garment surface and the body surface, respectively, of the absorbent core. The absorbent core is preferably joined with the topsheet, the backsheet, or both in any manner as is known by attachment means such as those well known in the art. However, embodiments of the present invention are envisioned wherein portions of the entire absorbent core are unattached to either the topsheet, the backsheet, or both.
WO 00/69484 cA o23~302~ 2ooi-m-o2 pCT/US00/13842 For example, the topsheet and/or backsheet can be joined to the absorbent core or to each other in any suitable manner known in the art. The term "joined", as used in this specification, encompasses configurations in which an element is directly secured to another element by affixing the element directly to the other element;
configurations in 5 which the element is indirectly secured to the other element by affixing the element to intermediate members) which in turn are affixed to the other element; and configurations in which one element is integral with another element, i.e., one element is essentially part of the other element. The backsheet and/or the topsheet may be joined to the absorbent core or to each other by a uniform continuous layer of adhesive, a patterned layer of 10 adhesive, or an array of separate lines, spirals, or spots of adhesive.
Adhesives which have been found to be satisfactory are manufactured by H. B. Fuller Company of St. Paul, Minnesota under the designation HL-1258 or H-2031. The attachment means will preferably comprise an open pattern network of filaments of adhesive as is disclosed in U.S. Patent 4,573,986, issued to Minetola, et al. on March 4, 1986, and which is incorporated herein by reference. An exemplary attachment means of an open pattern network of filaments comprises several lines of adhesive filaments swirled into a spiral pattern such as illustrated by the apparatus and method shown in U.S. Patent 3,911,173 issued to Sprague, Jr. on October 7, 1975; U.S. Patent 4,785,996 issued to Zwieker, et al.
on November 22, 1978; and U.S. Patent 4,842,666 issued to Werenicz on June 27, 1989.
Each of these patents are incorporated herein by reference. Alternatively, the attachment means may comprise heat bonds, pressure bonds, ultrasonic bonds, dynamic mechanical bonds, or any other suitable attachment means or combinations of these attachment means as are known in the art.
Skin care compositions are applied to at least a portion of the body contacting surface of the absorbent article. The skin care composition may be applied to a portion of or the entirety of the body contacting surface. It is preferable to apply the skin care composition to the entirety of the body contacting surface. Further, the skin care composition may be applied to the garment surface of the absorbent article if desired. The skin care composition may be applied in any suitable configuration, such as a plurality of stripes, a plurality of wave lines, a plurality of dots, etc. Details of the skin care compositions are described below.
A preferred embodiment of an absorbent article is shown in FIG. 1. Shown in FIG.
1 is a sanitary napkin which is one type of feminine protection devices and is used for external wear about the pudendal region of the wearer. As shown in FIG. 1, the sanitary napkin 20 preferably comprises an absorbent means (or "main body portion°') 22, and two WO 00/69484 cA o23~302~ 2ooi-ii-o2 pCT~S00/13842 optional flaps 24. The sanitary napkin 20 has two surfaces, a body-facing surface or "body surface" or and a garment surface 20B. The sanitary napkin 20 is shown in FIG. 1 as viewed from its body surface 20A. The body surface 20A is intended to be worn adjacent to the wearer's body. The garment surface 20B is intended to be placed adjacent to the wearer's undergarments when the sanitary napkin 20 is worn. In the embodiment shown in FIG. 1, "body contacting surface" includes the body surface 20A.
The sanitary napkin 20 has two centerlines, a principal longitudinal centerline L and a principal transverse centerline T. The term "longitudinal", as used herein, refers to a line, axis or direction in the plane of the sanitary napkin 20 that is generally aligned with (e.g., approximately parallel to) a vertical plane which bisects a standing wearer into left and right body halves when the sanitary napkin 20 is worn. The terms "transverse" or "lateral" used herein, are interchangeable, and refer to a line, axis or direction which lies within the plane of the sanitary napkin 20 that is generally perpendicular to the longitudinal direction.
FIG. 1 shows that the main body portion 22 of the sanitary napkin 20 comprises the portion of the sanitary napkin without the flaps 24. The main body portion 22 has two spaced apart longitudinal edges 26, two spaced apart transverse or end edges (or "ends") 28, which together form the periphery 30 of the main body portion. The main body portion 22 also has two end regions, which are designated first end region 32 and second end region 34. A central region 36 is disposed between the end regions 32 and 34. The end regions 32 and 34 extend outwardly in the longitudinal direction from the edges of the central region 36 about 1/8 to about 1/3 of the length of the main body portion. A detailed description of the characteristics of a central region and two end regions for a sanitary napkin is contained in U.S. Patent 4,690,680 issued to Higgins on September 1, 1987.
The main body portion 22 of the sanitary napkin 20 can be of any thickness, including relatively thick, intermediate thickness, relatively thin, or even very thin (or "ultra thin"). An "ultra-thin" sanitary napkin 20 as described in U.S. Patents 4,950,264 and 5,009,653 issued to Osborn preferably has a caliper of less than about 3 millimeters.
The embodiment of the sanitary napkin 20 shown in the drawings is intended to be an example of an ultra-thin sanitary napkin. The main body portion 22 of the sanitary napkin 20 may also be relatively flexible, so that it is comfortable for the wearer.
It should, however, be understood that the sanitary napkin shown is merely one embodiment, and that the present invention is not limited to absorbent articles of the type or having the specific configurations shown in the drawings.
WO 00/69484 cA o23~302~ 2ooi-ii-o2 pCT/US00/13842 FIG. 2 shows the individual components of the main body portion 22 of the sanitary napkin 20. The main body portion 22 of the sanitary napkin 20 preferably comprises at least three primary components. These include a liquid pervious topsheet 38, a liquid impervious backsheet 40, and an absorbent core 42 positioned between the topsheet 38 and the backsheet 40. Optionally, the absorbent core 42 may include other components such as an acquisition component 44. The acquisition component 44 may either be a separate component positioned between the topsheet 38 and the absorbent core 42, or it may comprise part of a composite topsheet or part of the absorbent core 42.
A topsheet 38 which is particularly suitable for use in the sanitary napkin 20 comprises an apertured formed film. Apertured formed films are preferred for the topsheet because they are pervious to body exudates and, if properly apertured, have a reduced tendency to allow liquids to pass back through and rewet the wearer's skin. Thus, the surface of the formed film which is in contact with the body remains dry, thereby reducing body soiling and creating a more comfortable feel for the wearer.
Suitable formed films are described in U.S. Patent 3,929,135, entitled "Absorptive Structures Having Tapered Capillaries", which issued to Thompson on December 30, 1975;
U.S.
Patent 4,324,246 entitled "Disposable Absorbent Article Having A Stain Resistant Topsheet", which issued to Mullane, et al. on April 13, 1982; U.S. Patent 4,342,314 entitled "Resilient Plastic Web Exhibiting Fiber-Like Properties", which issued to Radel, et al. on August 3, 1982; U.S. Patent 4,463,045 entitled "Macroscopically Expanded Three-Dimensional Plastic Web Exhibiting Non-Glossy Visi~~~4c; Surface and Cloth-Like Tactile Impression", which issued to Ahr et al. on July 31, 1984; U.S. Patent 4,780,352 entitled "Covering Structure For Absorbent Hygienic Sanitary Products, and an Absorbent Product Having Such A Covering", which issued to Palumbo on October 25, 1988;
U.S.
Patent 5,006,394 "Multilayer Polymeric Film" issued to Baird on April 9, 1991;
and U.S.
Patent Application Serial No. 08/442,935 entitled "Fluid Transport Webs Exhibiting Surface Energy Gradients" filed in the name of Ouellette, et al. on May 31, 1995 (PCT
Publication WO 96/00548, published January 11, 1996).
In a preferred embodiment, the topsheet 38 comprises an apertured formed film made in accordance with U.S. Patents 4,342,314 issued to Radel, et al. and 4,463,045 issued to Ahr, et al., which is marketed on sanitary napkins as the DRI-WEAVE
topsheet by The Procter & Gamble Company of Cincinnati, OH. Such an apertured film is preferably obtained as product No. X-5652 from Tredegar Film Products of Terre Haute, IN. In this preferred embodiment, during manufacture the resin used to form the apertured film is preferably provided with a surfactant incorporated therein.
WO 00/69484 cA o23~302~ 2ooi-ii-o2 PCT/US00/13842 In preferred embodiments of the present invention, the body surface of the topsheet 38 is hydrophilic so that liquids will be transferred through the topsheet more readily. If the topsheet is made of a hydrophobic material, at least the upper surface of the topsheet is treated to be hydrophilic so that liquids will transfer through the topsheet more rapidly.
This diminishes the likelihood that menstrual fluid will flow off the topsheet rather than flowing into and being absorbed by the absorbent core. The body surface of the topsheet 38 can be made hydrophilic by treating it with a surfactant. Suitable methods of treating a topsheet with a surfactant are described in U.S. Patent 4,950,254 issued to Osborn; U.S.
Patents 4,988,344 entitled "Absorbent Articles with Multiple Layer Absorbent Layers"
issued to Reising, et al on January 29, 1991; and U.S. Patent 4,988,345 entitled "Absorbent Articles with Rapid Acquiring Absorbent Cores" issued to Reising on January 29, 1991.
A backsheet 40 which is particularly suitable for use in the sanitary napkin comprises a polyethylene film having a thickness of from about 0.012 mm (0.5 mil) to about 0.051 mm (2.0 mils) as stated above. A suitable backsheet material is obtained as product No. 18-1401 from the Clopay Corporation of Cincinnati, Ohio. A
suitable breathable backsheet material is a laminate of an apertured film such as that described in U.S. Patent 3,929,135 issued to Thompson which is inverted so that the smaller openings of the tapered capillaries face the absorbent core 42 which is adhesively laminated to a microporous film such as that described in Exxon's U.S. Patent 4,777,073.
An absorbent core 42 which is particularly suitable for use in the sanitary napkin 20 comprises a mufti-bonded air laid nonwoven material. In this preferred embodiment, this mufti-bonded air laid nonwoven material comprises about 52% cellulose fibers, about 20% bi-component fibers, about 25% superabsorbent hydrogel-forming material (or absorbent gelling material) particles, and about 3% latex binder. The absorbent core 42 preferably has a basis weight of about 125 g/yd2 (about 1 SO g/m2), including the particles of absorbent gelling material. Preferably, this mufti-bonded air laid nonwoven absorbent core 42 is formed by depositing three streams of cellulose and bi-component fibers, with absorbent gelling material particles 58 laid down with the last stream of fibers to form the bottom portion of the absorbent core. While the absorbent core 42 is shown as a laminate in FIGS. 2 and 3, in preferred embodiments, the fibers are blended together to form a single web. Such a mufti-bonded air laid nonwoven material is preferably obtained in roll form as product 915000X313 from Merfin Hygienic Products.
WO 00/69484 cA o23~302~ 2ooi-ii-o2 PCT/C1S00/13842 In alternative embodiments, the mufti-bonded air laid nonwoven material used for the absorbent core can be bonded using some material other than latex (such as starch or PVA, for example). In another alternative embodiment, the absorbent core can be formed as a laminate that preferably also has a basis weight of about 150 g/m2 and comprises two (or more) layers of mufti-bonded air laid nonwoven material with the particles of absorbent gelling material therebetween. Suitable laminate absorbent core structures are described generally in U.S. Patents 4,950,264 and 5,009,653 issued to Osborn, U.S.
Patent 5,460,623 issued to Emenaker, et al. Another suitable absorbent core is described in U.S. Patent Application Serial No. 08/122,114, entitled "Sanitary Napkin Having Core Predisposed To A Convex Upward Configuration", filed in the name of Hines, et al. on September 16, 1993 (PCT Publication No. WO 95/07674, published March 23, 1995).
In the case of thicker sanitary napkins, the absorbent core 42 is preferably comprised of airfelt. Suitable absorbent cores for thicker sanitary napkins are described in U.S. Patent 5,234,422 issued to Sneller, et al. In a preferred embodiment, the topsheet 38, acquisition component 44, and absorbent core 42 can be provided with embossed channels as shown in the Sneller, et al. patent. If such embossed channels are used, they preferably lie laterally outside of the longitudinally-oriented concave lines 56A defining the sides of the unbonded window 54.
The absorbent core 42 optionally includes an acquisition component 44. The acquisition component 44 can be made from any materials suitable. The acquisition component 44 may, for example, be comprised of woven or nonwoven materials.
The fibers or other components of these materials may be synthetic, or partially synthetic and partially natural. Suitable synthetic fibers include polyester, polypropylene, polyethylene, nylon, viscous rayon, or cellulose acetate fibers. Suitable natural fibers include cotton, cellulose, or other natural fibers. The acquisition component 44 may also be at least partially comprised of cross-linked cellulose fibers. The acquisition component 44, if nonwoven, can be made by a number of different processes. These include, but are not limited to: air laid, wet laid, meltblown, spunbonded, carded, thermally bonded, air through bonded, powder bonded, latex bonded, solvent bonded, spunlaced, and combinations of the foregoing.
An acquisition component 44 which is particularly suitable for use in the sanitary napkin 20 comprises a laminate of two nonwoven materials. The uppermost layer preferably comprises an 19 g/yd2 (22.5 g/m2) spunbonded polypropylene nonwoven material referred to as product No. 065MLPV60U (or "P-9") obtained from Fiberweb, WO 00/69484 cA o23~302~ 2ooi-m-o2 PCT/US00/13842 North America of Washougal, WA. The underlying layer preferably comprises a multi-bonded air laid nonwoven material that is thermally bonded using powder bonding and latex bonding. 1n a preferred embodiment, this multi-bonded air laid nonwoven material comprises about 77% cellulose fibers, about 20% powder binder, and about 3%
latex 5 binder (1.5% sprayed on each side of the web) and has a basis weight of about 50 g/yd2 (about 60 g/m2). Such a mufti-bonded air laid nonwoven is preferably obtained as product No. 90830X312 from Merfin Hygienic Products, Ltd. of Delta, British Columbia, Canada. These two nonwoven layers are preferably laminated together by depositing the mufti-bonded air laid nonwoven material on the spunbonded polypropylene nonwoven 10 material. The spunbonded material is used as a process aid or carrier web in the process of forming this laminate.
In alternative embodiments, the spunbonded polypropylene nonwoven material may have a greater or a lower basis weight, or it may be replaced by an air laid tissue, a wet laid tissue, or any of the materials described above. If a wet laid tissue is used instead of a 15 polypropylene nonwoven material, the orientation of the laminate is preferably reversed so that in the finished product, the mufti-bonded air laid nonwoven material lies above the wet laid tissue layer. In the case of thicker sanitary napkins, any of the acquisition components described above can be used. Additionally, in one preferred thicker sanitary napkin embodiment, a low density latex bonded air laid material can be used as the entire acquisition component (that is, no tertiary topsheet is required). A low density latex bonded air laid material suitable for this purpose is a material having a basis weight of about 80 g/m2 known as product No. FG413MHB, which is obtained from Walkisoft, USA of Mt. Holly, NC.
The topsheet 38, the backsheet 40, and the absorbent core 42 may be assembled in a variety of configurations known in the art (including layered or "sandwich"
configurations and wrapped or "tube" configurations). FIGS. 1-3 show a preferred embodiment of the sanitary napkin 20 assembled in a sandwich construction. In FIGS. 1-3, the topsheet 38 and the backsheet 40 have length and width dimensions generally larger than those of the absorbent core 42. The topsheet 38 and the backsheet 40 extend beyond the edges of the absorbent core 42 to form portions of the periphery 30. In the embodiment shown in FIGS. 2 and 3 having the acquisition component 44, the garment-facing side of the topsheet 38 is preferably joined to the body-facing side of the absorbent core (i.e., the body-facing side of the acquisition component 44). If the absorbent core 42 has a layered structure, each layer may be joined each other, if desired. The acquisition component 44 may be joined to the absorbent core 42, if desired. If these components are joined, they WO 00/69484 cA o23~302~ 2ooi-m-o2 PCT/US00/13842 can be joined in any of the manners described hereinabove. The backsheet 40 is preferably joined to the garment-facing side of the absorbent core 42 by adhesives.
The portions of the topsheet 38 and backsheet 40 that extend beyond the edges of the absorbent core 42 are preferably also joined to each other. Preferably, in the embodiment shown, these portions of the topsheet 38 and backsheet 40 are joined using adhesives over substantially the entire portions that extend beyond the edges of the absorbent core 42 and a crimp seal at the end edges 28 of the main body portion 22 where the topsheet 38 and backsheet 40 are densified by the application of pressure or heat and pressure.
The sanitary napkin 20 shown in FIGS. 1-3, as discussed above, comprises an optional pair of flaps 24 that are joined to the main body portion 22. The flaps 24 extend laterally outward beyond the longitudinal side edges 26 of the main body portion 22 from their proximal edges 60 to their distal edges (or "free end") 62. The flaps 24 extend outward from at least the central region 36 of the main body portion 22.
The flaps 24 can be joined to the main body portion 22 in any suitable manner.
Preferably, in the embodiment shown in FIGS. 1-3, the flaps 24 are integral with the main body portion 22 (that is, the flaps 24 comprise integral extensions of the topsheet 38 and backsheet 40). In other alternative embodiments, the flaps 24 can comprise separate components that are joined to the main body portion 22. The flaps 24 are each joined to (or associated with) main body portion 22 along a junctr.av. This is typically a longitudinally-oriented (or "longitudinal") juncture, such as lines of juncture 68. As used herein, the terms "juncture" (or "line of juncture") refer to regions where the flaps 24 extend from or are joined to the main body portion 22. The line of juncture 68 in the embodiment illustrated in the drawings can be considered to be defined by concave inwardly-oriented regions or lines. When the sanitary napkin 20 is worn by the wearer, the flaps 24 are folded under the wearer's undergarment. The flaps 24 are typically folded along or adjacent the proximal edges 60. If the width of crotch of wearer's undergarment is narrower than that of the main body portion 22, the flaps 24 may be folded along a longitudinal portion of the main body portion 22 inside the proximal edge 60.
If the width of crotch of wearer's undergarment is wider than that of the main body portion 22, the flaps 24 may be folded along a hinge 70 of the main body portion 22 which is described below.
The flaps 24 can be in any suitable configuration. Suitable flaps are described in Reexamined Patent No. B1 4,589,876 entitled "Sanitary Napkin", issued to Van Tilburg, WO 00/69484 cA o23~302~ 2ooi-ii-o2 pCT/US00/13842 Certificate of Reexamination issued April 27, 1993; U.S. Patent 4,687,478 entitled °'Shaped Sanitary Napkin With Flaps", which issued to Van Tilburg on August 18, 1987;
U.S. Patent 5,389,094 entitled "Absorbent Article Having Flaps and Zones of Differential Extensibility" issued to Lavash, et al. on February 14, 1995; U.S. Patent 5,558,663 entitled "Absorbent Article Having Undergarment Covering Components With Zones of Extensibility" issued to Weinberger, et al. on September 24, 1996 (which describes an alternative to flaps that are applied by the wearer); and in International Patent Application Serial No. PCT US 96/15957 entitled "Absorbent Article Having Flaps With Step Configuration and Zones of Extensibility" filed on October 3, 1996, in the name of Lash, et al.
The garment surface 20B of the sanitary napkin 20 may include, and preferably does include, fasteners for attaching the sanitary napkin to the wearer's undergarment.
FIG. 2 shows the central pad fastener 82 which is adapted to secure the main body portion 22 of the sanitary napkin to the crotch region of an undergarment. Any types of fasteners known in the art, such as adhesive fasteners and mechanical fasteners can be used.
Fasteners comprising adhesives have been found to work well for this purpose, with pressure-sensitive adhesives being preferred. In a preferred embodiment, the central pad fastener 82 comprises a pair of spaced apart longitudinally-oriented strips or zones of adhesive that are centered about the longitudinal centerline L.
The outer surface of the flaps 24, adjacent the distal edges 62 of the flaps, is preferably provided with a flap adhesive 84. The flap adhesive 84 is used to assist in maintaining the flaps 24 in position after they are wrapped around the edge of the crotch portion of the panty. Suitable adhesive fasteners are described in greater detail in U.S.
Patent 4,917,697. The flaps 24 can be maintained in position by attaching the flaps 24 to the undergarment, or to the opposing flap.
The fasteners are not limited to adhesive attachment means. Any type of fastener used in the art can be used for such purpose. For example, the sanitary napkin 20 could be secured to the wearer's undergarment by mechanical fasteners, such as VELCRO, or the fasteners described in U.S. Patent 4,946,527 entitled "Pressure-Sensitive Adhesive Fastener and Method of Making the Same" issued to Battrell on August 7, 1990, or U.S.
Patent 5,392,498 entitled "Non-Abrasive Skin Friendly Mechanical Fastening System"
issued to Goulait, et al. on February 28, 1995. For simplicity, however, the fasteners will be described in terms of adhesive attachment means.
WO 00/69484 cA o23~302~ 2ooi-m-o2 pCT/US00/13842 The adhesive attachment means are respectively covered by removable release liners, central pad release liner and flap release liner, both designated 86.
The pressure-sensitive adhesives should be covered with release liners 86 to keep the adhesives from sticking to extraneous surfaces prior to use. Suitable release liners are described in U.S.
Patent 4,917,697. A particularly preferred release liner which also serves as an individual package for wrapping the sanitary napkin is described in U.S. Patent 4,556,146 issued to Swanson, et al.
The sanitary napkin 20 shown in FIGS. 1-3 may have a deformed region that forms a hinge 70 between the main body portion 22 and at least a portion of the flaps 24.
The sanitary napkin 20 preferably also has at least one zone of extensibility (or "zone of differential extensibility") 72 for relieving the stresses on the flaps 24 when they are folded around a panty crotch. These are described in PCT publication WO
published on April 10, 1997 titled "Absorbent Article Having Flaps With A
Deformed Hinge And Zones Of Extensibility" which is incorporated herein by reference.
Skin care compositions are applied to at least a portion of the body contacting surface of the sanitary napkin 20. The skin care composition may be applied to any portion of the body contacting surface of the sanitary napkin 20. If desired, the skin care composition may be applied to a portion of the garment surface of the sanitary napkin 20.
In the embodiment shown in FIG. 1, the skin care composition is preferably applied to the entirety of the topsheet 38 of the main body portion 22. The skin care composition is also preferably applied to the entire area of the integral topsheet 38 of the flaps 24.
Alternatively, the skin care composition may be applied to only a portion of the topsheet 38 of the main body portion 22 and/or a portion of the integral topsheet 38 of the flaps 24.
For example, the skin care composition may not be applied to the area of the flaps 24 which is not expected to contact the wearer's skin in a normal use condition of the sanitary napkin 20 (e.g., the distal area 91 of the flap 24 which is adjacent to the distal edge 62 (refer to FIG. 4)). However, if the skin care composition is applied to a portion of the sanitary napkin selectively, it is preferable that the skin care composition is applied to the flap folding area 90 where the flaps 24 are expected to be folded. The skin care composition applied to the flap folding area 90 of the sanitary napkin 20 reduces the wearer's discomfort such as itch and/or abrasion due to rubbing of the flap folding area 90 of the sanitary napkin 20 against the wearer's skin. If the skin care composition is applied to a portion of the sanitary napkin selectively, it is also preferable that the skin care composition is applied to longitudinal end areas 92 and 94 of the sanitary napkin 20. The skin care composition applied to the front end area 92 of the sanitary napkin 20 tends to WO 00/69484 cA o23~302~ 2ooi-ii-o2 pCT/US00/13842 reduce itch at the front region of the sanitary napkin 20 (which corresponds to the portion of the wearer's body around pubic hairs). The skin care composition applied to the back end area 94 of the sanitary napkin 20 tends to reduce adherence of the sanitary napkin to the wearer's skin at the back region of the sanitary napkin 20 (which corresponds to the portion of the wearer's body around anus). It is also preferable that the skin care composition is applied to central area 96 of the sanitary napkin 20. The skin care composition applied to the central area 96 of the sanitary napkin 20 tends to reduce adherence of the sanitary napkin to the wearer's skin at the central region of the sanitary napkin 20 (which corresponds to the portion of the wearer's body around vulva). In another embodiment, if the sanitary napkin 20 has cuffs along the longitudinal side edges 26, the surface of the cuffs may be treated with the skin care composition.
Numerous other embodiments of the sanitary napkin 20 are possible. For example, the main body portion of the sanitary napkin can be provided in the form of a compound sanitary napkin that has its components bonded as described herein for improved integrity and acquisition. General descriptions of compound sanitary napkins are found in P&G's U.S. Patent 4,425,130 entitled "Compound Sanitary Napkin" issued to DesMarais, et al.
on January 10, 1984, and in Statutory Invention Registration H1614 entitled "Body Fitting Compound Sanitary Napkin", published in the name of Mayer, et al. on November 5, 1996. To form the compound sanitary napkin, a sanitary napkin such as that described herein can serve as the panty protector (or "base pad") and a tube of absorbent material wrapped by a topsheet (or "primary menstrual pad") can be placed on top of the sanitary napkin and attached thereto at the ends. The fusion bonding on the base pad is preferably distributed in the same manner as shown on the drawings herein. The attachment of the tube to the sanitary napkin is preferably achieved by fusion bonding extensions of the topsheet material at the ends of the tube to the base pad. In some preferred embodiments of such a compound sanitary napkin, there may also be attachment between the ends of the tube of absorbent material and the base pad. The tube of the compound sanitary napkin can be attached to the base pad between its ends by any suitable attachment means, such as by adhesives.
The skin care composition may be applied to the body contacting surface of other types of absorbent articles. Such absorbent articles having a body contacting surface include, but not limited to, tampons, interlabial absorbent articles, panti-liners, incontinence articles, diapers including infant diapers, training pants, adult incontinence diapers, etc.
WO 00/69484 cA o23~302~ 2ooi-m-o2 PCT/US00/13842 Herein "tampon" refers to any type of absorbent structure which is inserted into the vaginal canal or other body cavities for the absorption of fluid therefrom. The basic tampon structures are described in U.S. Patents 1,926,900 issued to Haas on September 12, 1933; U.S. Patent 1,946,911 issued to Haas on July 3, 1934; and U.S.
Patent 3,322,123 issued to Giswold, et al. on May 30, 1967.
Herein "interlabial absorbent article" refers to an absorbent device that is insertable into the interlabial space of a female wearer for catamenial purposes, incontinence protection, or both. Suitable interlabial absorbent articles are disclosed in, e.g., U.S. Patent 5,762,644 entitled "Toilet-Disposable Absorbent Interlabial Device"
10 issued to Osborn, et al. on June 9, 1998; PCT Publication No. WO 98/29078 entitled "Thin Comfortable Interlabial Absorbent Structure" published in the name of Osborn, et al. on July 9, 1998; U.S. Patent Des. 404,814 entitled "Interlabial Absorbent Device"
issued to Mayer on January 26, 1999; U. S. Application Serial No. 09/071,425, filed on May 1, 1998 in the name of Brown, et al.
15 The terms "panty liner" or "panti-liner" refer to absorbent articles that are less bulky than sanitary napkins which are generally worn by women between their menstrual periods. Suitable absorbent articles are disclosed in, e.g., U.S. Pat. No.
4,738,676 entitled "Pantiliner" issued to Osborn on Apr. 19, 1988.
Herein "incontinence article" refers to pads, undergarments (pads held in place by 20 a suspension system of same type, such as a belt, or the la?;;~::r~, inserts for absorbent articles, capacity boosters for absorbent articles, briefs, bed pads, and the like regardless of whether they are worn by adults or other incontinent persons. Suitable incontinence articles are disclosed in, e.g., U.S. Patent No. 4,253,461 issued to Strickland, et al. on March 3, 1981; U.S. Patent Nos. 4,597,760 and 4,597,761 issued to Buell; the above-mentioned U.S. Patent No. 4,704,115; U.S. Patent No. 4,909,802 issued to Ahr, et al.;
U.S. Patent No. 4,964,860 issued to Gipson, et al. on October 23, 1990; and in U.S. Patent Application Serial No. 07/637,090 filed by Noel, et al. on January 3, 1991 (PCT
Publication No. WO 92/11830 published on July 23, 1992).
Herein "diaper" refers to an absorbent article generally worn by infants, and incontinent persons that is worn about the lower torso of the wearer. Suitable diapers are disclosed in, e.g., U.S. Patent 3,860,003 issued to Buell on January 14, 1975;
U.S. Patent 5,151,092 issued to Buell et al. on September 29, 1992; U.S. Patent 5,221,274 issued to Buell et al. on June 22, 1993; and U.S. Patent 5,554,145 issued to Roe et al.
on September 10, 1996.
WO 00/69484 cA o23~302~ 2ooi-ii-o2 pCT/US00/13842 Herein "training pants" refers to disposable garments having fixed sides and leg openings. Training pants are placed in position on the wearer by inserting the wearer's legs into the leg openings and sliding the training pant into position about the wearer's lower torso. Suitable training pants are disclosed in, e.g., U.S. Patent No.
5,246,433, issued to Hasse, et al. on September 21, 1993.
The skin care composition may be applied to a portion of or the entirety of the body contacting surface of absorbent articles. For example, the skin care composition may be applied on a portion of or the entirety of the topsheet of the absorbent articles. If the absorbent article has other portions which contact the wearer's skin such as cuffs, the skin care composition may be applied on a portion of or the entirety of those portions.
Herein "cuff' includes leg cuffs including barrier cuffs, gasketing cuffs, combinations and variations thereof; transverse barriers and pockets/spacers; side panels; as well as waist cuffs including waist flaps, waistbands, waistcaps, and unitary waistcap/waistbands; and combinations of all or some of these cuffs.
Representative topsheets treated with a skin care composition are described in, e.g., U.S. Patent 5,643,588, "Diaper Having a Lotioned Topsheet", issued to Roe, Bakes & Warner on July 1, 1997; and U.S. Patent 5,635,191, "Diaper Having a Lotioned Topsheet Containing a Polysiloxane Emollient", issued to Roe & Mackey on June 3, 1997; U.S. Patent 5,609,587, "Diaper Having a Lotioned Topsheet Comprising a Liquid Polyol Polyester Emollient and an Immobilizing Agent", issued to Roe on March 11, 1997; and U.S. Patent 5,607,760, "Disposable Absorbent Article Having a Lotioned Topsheet Containing an Emollient and a Polyol Polyester Immobilizing Agent", issued to Roe, on March 4, 1997; each of which are incorporated herein by reference.
Methods for delivering a skin care composition via the repeated use of absorbent articles having such treated topsheets are disclosed in U.S. Patent Application Serial No.
08/926,532 "A
Method For Maintaining or Improving Skin Health", Elder, et al., filed on September 10, 1997; U.S. Patent Application Serial No. 08/926,533 "A Method For Improving Skin Condition", Van Rijswijck, et al. filed on September 10, 1997; and U.S. Patent Application Serial No. 08/908,852 "Diaper Having A Lotioned Topsheet", Roe, et al. filed on August 8, 1997; each of which is incorporated herein by reference.
Representative cuffs treated with a skin care composition are described in, e.g., U.S. Patent Application Serial No. 08/766,386 "Absorbent Articles Having Lotioned Leg Cuffs", Schulte et al, filed on December 3, 1996; U.S. Patent Application Serial No. 08/840,039 "Absorbent Articles Having Lotioned Leg Cuffs Containing a Polysiloxane Emollient", Schulte et al, filed on April 24, 1997; U.S. Patent Application Serial No. 08/962,310 "Absorbent WO 00/69484 cA o23~302~ 2ooi-m-o2 PCT/US00/13842 Article Having cuffs and Topsheet with Skin Care Composition Disposed Thereon", Schulte et al, filed on October 31, 1997; U.S. Patent Application Serial No.
08/962,312 "Absorbent Article Having cuffs and Topsheet with Skin Care Compositions) Disposed Thereon", Vanri et al, filed on October 31, 1997; each of which is incorporated herein by reference. Representative interlabial absorbent articles treated with a skin care composition are disclosed in, e.g., U.S. Patent Application Serial No.
08/869,897 "Emollient-Treated Absorbent Interlabial Device", Osborn et al, filed on June 5, 1997;
U.S. Patent Application Serial No. 08/869,700 "Absorbent Interlabial Device Treated With A Polysiloxane Emollient", Osborn et al, filed on June 5, 1997; each of which is incorporated herein by reference. Representative absorbent articles having breathability treated with a skin care composition are disclosed in, e.g., U.S. Patent Application Serial No. 08/926,566 "Disposable Absorbent Articles Providing a Skin Condition Benefit", ELDER et al., filed on 09/10/97.
B. Skin Care Composition.
While the specific skin care compositions) delivered (referred to herein as "skin care composition" and "composition") in accordance with the present invention is an important factor in delivering desirable skin effects, it is preferred that the skin care composition should provide a protective, nonocclusive function (e.g., a relatively liquid impervious but vapor pervious barrier) to avoid skin hyperhydration and skin exposure to materials contained in body exudates; an abrasion minimizing function to reduce skin irritation in the areas where the body contacting surface of absorbent articles contact the wearer's skin; or contain agents that deliver, either directly or indirectly, skin care benefits. For example, indirect benefits include improved removal of skin irntants such as menses, feces or urine. The composition may be in a variety of forms, including, but not limited to, emulsions, lotions, creams, ointments, salves, powders, suspensions, encapsulations, gels, and the like.
The skin care compositions are solid or semisolid at 20°C and are solid or semisolid at 40°C. Herein, "semisolid" means the skin care composition has a viscoelastic property (i.e., when no shear stress is applied, the skin care composition has the appearance of a solid. However, as shear stress is increased, the skin care composition can be made to flow as a fluid.) This property ensures the stability of the skin care composition under static conditions (e.g., under condition where the product is in storage and/or transportation) and maximize the availability of the skin care composition transferred to the skin for the skin effects under mechanical shear (e.g., under WO 00/69484 cA o23~302~ 2ooi-ii-o2 pCT/US00/13842 condition where the product is worn by the wearer and shear stress is applied to the skin care composition).
The skin care composition has viscosity of more than about 105 Poise under shear stress of less than about 3X104 dynes/cm2, and viscosity of less than about 102 Poise under shear stress of more than about 106 dynes/cm2, at 40°C.
Preferably, the skin care composition has viscosity of more than about 106 Poise under shear stress of less than about 3X104 dynes/cm2, and viscosity of less than about 101 Poise under shear stress of more than about 106 dynes/cm2, at 40°C. Herein, 40°C represents the temperature which the skin care composition potentially experiences while the article is in storage or transported or worn in contact with the skin. Shear stress of about 3X104 dynes/cm2 represents the maximum shear stress applied to the skin care composition while the article is in storage or transported. Shear stress of about 106 dynes/cm2 represents the shear stress applied to the skin care composition at least once while the article is worn.
Viscosity of about 105 Poise is the lowermost viscosity required for preventing the skin care composition from migrating in storage or transportation. Viscosity of more than about 106 Poise is more preferable to prevent the skin care composition from migrating.
Viscosity of about 102 Poise is the uppermost viscosity required for obtaining the effective lubrication between the wearer's skin and the body contacting surface of the article and transfer of the skin care composition onto the wearer's skin.
Viscosity of less than about 10' Poise is more preferable for effective lubrication and transfer of the skin care composition. Viscosity at various shear stress should be measured by available Rheometers such as cone to plate or plate to plate type Rheometers (e.g.
Rheometer SR-2000, Rheometrics Inc.), at 40°C.
FIG. 5 shows a graph of shear stress vs. viscosity of one example of preferred skin care composition. When the skin care composition has viscosity of more than, about 105 Poise under shear stress of about less than 3X104 dynes/cm2 at 40°C, the skin care composition has less tendency to migrate into the interior of the article in storage or transportation and has more tendency to remain on the body contacting surface of the article. When the skin care composition has viscosity of less than about 102 Poise under shear stress of more than about 106 dynes/cm2 at 40°C, the skin care composition has more tendency to transfer to the wearer's skin. Thus, the skin care composition tends to remain stable on the body contacting surface of the article in storage or transportation, thereby requiring less initial amount of skin care composition disposed on the body contacting surface. Once the absorbent article is worn by the wearer, the skin care composition is exposed to higher shear stress than the shear stress in storage or WO 00/69484 cA o23~302~ 2ooi-ii-o2 pCT/US00/13842 transportation. Thereby, the skin care composition starts to flow and effective amount of the skin care composition is transferred to the wearer's skin. Herein, the term "effective amount of a skin care composition" refers to an amount of a particular composition which, when applied or migrated to ("disposed on") the body contacting surface, will be effective in delivering desirable skin effects mentioned above.
The skin care compositions also have consistency of not more than about 300, preferably of not more than about 150, more preferably of not more than about 100, at 40°C. Herein "consistency" means resistance against deformation of skin care composition. When the skin care composition has consistency of not more than about 300 at 40°C, the skin care composition has more tendency to remain on the body contacting surface of the absorbent article. Consistency can be measured by Penetrometer described in ASTM D5, at 40°C. The Penetrometer which is used for measuring consistency is supplied by Petrolab Company, 874 Albany-Shaker Road, Latham, NY, under the designation of PNR-10.
The effective amount of composition disposed on the body contacting surface will depend, to a large extent, on the particular skin care composition used, a portion of the body contacting surface where the skin care composition is applied, and/or a product form (e.g., diaper, sanitary napkin, etc.). Nonetheless, the minimum quantity of the skin care composition disposed on at least a portion of the body contacting surface of absorbent articles will preferably be not less than about 0.05 mg/in2 (0.0078 mg/cm2), more preferably not less than about 0.1 mg/in2 (0.016 mg/cm2), st~l1 more preferably not less than about 0.5 mg/in2 (0.078 mg/cm2). The maximum quantity of the skin care composition disposed on at least a portion of the body contacting surface will preferably be not more than about 80 mg/in2 (12 mg/cm2), more preferably not more than about 25 mg/in2 (3.9 mg/cm2), still more preferably not more than about 5 mg/in2 (0.8 mg/cm2).
These ranges are by way of illustration only and the skilled artisan will recognize that the nature of the composition will dictate the level that must be disposed thereon to achieve the desired skin effects, and that such levels are ascertainable by routine experimentation in light of the present disclosure. Particularly when the skin care composition such as that described in Example 1 is applied to the body contacting surface (i.e., the topsheet 38 of the main body portion 22 and the flap 24) of the sanitary napkin shown in FIG.
1, the quantity of the skin care composition disposed on the body contacting surface preferably ranges from about 0.05 mg/in2 (0.0078 mg/cm2) to about 25 mg/in2 (3.9 mg/cm2), more preferably from about 0.1 mg/in2 (0.016 mg/cm2) to about 10 mg/in2 (1.5 mg/cm2), still more preferably from about 0.5 mg/in2 (0.078 mg/cm2) to about 4 mg/in2 (0.6 mg/cm2).
WO 00/69484 cA o23~302~ 2ooi-m-o2 PCT/US00/13842 The skin care compositions may comprise: (1) one or more emollients) (2) one or more immobilizing agents) to stabilize the emollients) (3) one or more skin care active ingredient(s), and (4) other optional components. Although the kind, grade and content of each component of the skin care compositions are arbitrary, the skin care composition 5 including at least one skin care active ingredient satisfies viscosity of more than about 105 Poise under shear stress of less than about 3X104 dynes/cm2, and viscosity of less than about 102 Poise under shear stress of more than about 106 dynes/cm2, at 40°C.
Especially, when the skin care composition comprises emollients and immobilizing agents, the selected ranges of quantity of emollients and immobilizing agents help to 10 achieve the above viscosity range. Namely, the skin care composition comprises from about 40 to about 90% of the emollient. Preferably, the skin care composition comprises from about 50 to about 85%, more preferably from about 60 to about 80%, of the emollient. The skin care composition comprises from about 10 to about 60% of the immobilizing agent. Preferably, the skin care composition comprises from about 1 S to 15 about 50%, more preferably from about 20 to about 40%, of the immobilizing agent.
1. Emollient One key component of the skin care composition is one or more emollient(s).
The emollients are selected from materials that soften, smoothen, coat, moisturize, lubricate or cleanses the skin. In general, an emollient simultaneously accomplishes several of these 20 objectives such as smoothing, moisturizing and lubricating the skin. The emollient preferably has a viscoelastic consistency at 20°C. However, this is not essential as long as the skin care composition such as the combination of the emollients and the other components (e.g., immobilizing agents) satisfies the viscosity described above.
The emollients are also substantially free of water. Herein, substantially free of 25 water means that water is not intentionally added to the emollients.
Addition of water to the emollients is not needed in preparing or using the skin care compositions.
However, minor and or trace quantities of water in the emollient that are contained as the results of ambient humidity can be tolerated without adverse effect. Typically, the emollients contain about 5% or less water, preferably about 1% or less water, most preferably about 0.5% or less water.
The emollients are preferably hydrophobic such that the sweat, feces, and/or the menses form larger contact angle against the emollient than against the skin and or the topsheet of the article. The hydrophobic emollient reduces wetting of the sweat, feces WO 00/69484 cA o23~302~ 2ooi-ii-o2 PCT/US00/13842 and/or the menses against the skin and or the topsheet of the article, thereby reducing sticky feeling on the wearer's skin.
The emollients include petroleum-based, fatty acid ester type, alkyl ethoxylate type, fatty acid ester ethoxylates, fatty alcohol type, polysiloxane type, or mixtures of them.
Petroleum-based emollients include petrolatum. Petrolatum is a mixture of aliphatic hydrocarbons having alkyl chain length of 16 or more and possesses inherently a jelly appearance and a jelly hand. Petrolatum is also sometimes categorized as a mixture of mineral oil and microcrystalline wax. Herein, mineral oil refers to a fraction of petrolatum having less viscous mixtures of hydrocarbons having alkyl chain length of from 16 to 24. Herein, microcrystalline wax refers to a fraction of petrolatum having more viscous mixtures of hydrocarbons having alkyl chain length of 25 or more.
Petrolatum as the emollient provides the smoothness of the skin because of its jelly hand.
Also, petrolatum as the emollient coats the skin or can be absorbed by skin, thereby resulting in moisturizing the skin.
Petrolatum contains heavy aliphatic hydrocarbons and light aliphatic hydrocarbons. The heavy aliphatic hydrocarbons and the light aliphatic hydrocarbons can be defined by alkyl chain length of alkanes in petrolatum including both normal chain and isomers. The light aliphatic hydrocarbons of petrolatum tends to migrate faster than the heavy aliphatic hydrocarbons of petrolatum because molecular weight and diameter of molecules determine the flow property (i.e., viscosity) and diffusion rate of aliphatic hydrocarbons. Therefore, it is preferable that the heavy aliphatic hydrocarbons presents more than the light aliphatic hydrocarbons in petrolatum. The amount of the heavy aliphatic hydrocarbons and the light aliphatic hydrocarbons is comparable by weight ((weight = (the number of the molecules) x (molecular weight of the molecules)).
Reduction of the light aliphatic hydrocarbons contributes to reduce migration of petrolatum. However, too much heavy aliphatic hydrocarbons may render the skin care composition too hard to flow. Therefore, the balance between the amount of the heavy aliphatic hydrocarbons and the amount of the light aliphatic hydrocarbons should be made. Petrolatum preferably has the heavy aliphatic hydrocarbons having alkyl chain length of from 33-36 more than the light aliphatic hydrocarbons having alkyl chain length of from 23-26. In this case, the ratio of the heavy aliphatic hydrocarbons to the light aliphatic hydrocarbons is preferably between 2.0 : 1.0 and 1.0 : 1.0, more preferably between 1.5 : 1.0 and 1.0 : 1Ø More preferably, petrolatum has the heavy aliphatic WO 00/69484 cA o23~302~ 2ooi-m-o2 PCT/US00/13842 hydrocarbons having alkyl chain length of from 30-36 more than the light aliphatic hydrocarbons having alkyl chain length of from 20-26. In this case, the ratio of the heavy aliphatic hydrocarbons to the light aliphatic hydrocarbons is preferably between 2.5 : 1.0 and 1.0 : 1.0, more preferably between 2.0 : 1.0 and 1.0 : 1Ø Yet preferably, petrolatum has the heavy aliphatic hydrocarbons having alkyl chain length of from 27-36 more than the light aliphatic hydrocarbons having alkyl chain length of from 17-26. In this case, the ratio of the heavy aliphatic hydrocarbons to the light aliphatic hydrocarbons is preferably between 3.5 : 1.0 and 1.5 : 1.0, more preferably between 3.0 : 1.0 and 2.0 :
1Ø
Suitable fatty acid esters include those derived from C12-C2g fatty acids, preferably C16-C24 saturated fatty acids, and short chain (C1-Cg, preferably C1-C3) monohydric alcohols. Representative examples of such esters include methyl palmitate, methyl stearate, isopropyl laurate, isopropyl myristate, isopropyl palmitate, ethylhexyl palmitate and mixtures thereof. Suitable fatty acid esters can also be derived from esters of longer chain fatty alcohols (C12-C2g, preferably C12-C16) and shorter chain fatty acids e.g. lactic acid such as lauryl lactate and cetyl lactate. Fatty acid esters as the emollients provide the smoothness of the skin. Also, fatty acid esters as the emollients coat the skin, thereby resulting in moisturizing the skin.
Suitable alkyl ethoxylates include C12-C22 fatty alcohol ethoxylates having an average degree of ethoxylation of from about 2 to about 30. Preferably, the fatty alcohol ethoxylate is selected from the group consisting of lauryl, cetyl, and stearyl ethoxylates, and mixtures thereof, having an average degree of ethoxylation ranging from about 2 to about 23. Representative examples of such alkyl ethoxylates include laureth-3 (a lauryl ethoxylate having an average degree of ethoxylation of 3), laureth-23 (a lauryl ethoxylate having an average degree of ethoxylation of 23), ceteth-10 (a cetyl alcohol ethoxylate having an average degree of ethoxylation of 10) and steareth-10 (a stearyl alcohol ethoxylate having an average degree of ethoxylation of 10). These alkyl ethoxylates as the emollients are typically used in combination with petrolatum as the emollient, at a weight ratio of alkyl ethoxylate emollient to petrolatum emollient of from about 1:1 to about 1:5, preferably from about 1:2 to about 1:4.
Suitable fatty alcohols include C12-C24 fatty alcohols, preferably C16-C24 fatty alcohols, most preferable C 1 g-C24 alcohols. Representative examples include cetyl alcohol, stearyl alcohol, behenyl alcohol and mixtures thereof. These fatty alcohols as the emollients are typically used in combination with petrolatum as the emollient, at a weight WO 00/69484 cA o23~302~ 2ooi-ii-o2 pCT/US00/13842 ratio of fatty alcohol emollient to petrolatum emollient of from about 1:1 to about 1:5, preferably from about 1:1 to about 1:2.
Other suitable types of emollients include polysiloxane compounds which sometimes are called silicone compounds or silicone polymer compounds instead.
In general suitable polysiloxane compounds include those having monomeric siloxane units of the following structure:
-Si-O-wherein, R1 and R2, for each independent siloxane monomeric unit can each independently be hydrogen or any alkyl, aryl, alkenyl, alkaryl, arakyl, cycloalkyl, halogenated hydrocarbon, or other radical. Any of such radicals can be substituted or unsubstituted. R1 and R2 radicals of any particular monomeric unit may differ from the corresponding functionalities of the next adjoining monomeric unit.
Additionally, the polysiloxane can be either a straight chain, a branched chain or have a cyclic structure.
The radicals R1 and R2 can additionally independently be other silaceous functionalities such as, but not limited to siloxanes, polysiloxanes, silanes, and polysilanes. The radicals R1 and R2 may contain any of a variety of organic functionalities including, for example, alcohol, carboxylic acid, phenyl, and amine functionalities.
Exemplary alkyl radicals are methyl, ethyl, propyl, butyl, pentyl, hexyl, octyl, decyl, octadecyl, and the like. Exemplary alkenyl radicals are vinyl, allyl, and the like.
Exemplary aryl radicals are phenyl, diphenyl, naphthyl, and the like.
Exemplary alkaryl radicals are toyl, xylyl, ethylphenyl, and the like. Exemplary aralkyl radicals are benzyl, alpha-phenylethyl, beta-phenylethyl, alpha-phenylbutyl, and the like.
Exemplary cycloalkyl radicals are cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, and the like.
Exemplary halogenated hydrocarbon radicals are chloromethyl, bromoethyl, tetrafluorethyl, fluorethyl, trifluorethyl, trifluorotloyl, hexafluoroxylyl, and the like.
Viscosity of polysiloxanes useful may vary as widely as the viscosity of polysiloxanes in general vary, so long as the polysiloxane is flowable or can be made to be flowable for application to the article topsheet. This includes, but is not limited to, viscosity as low as 5 centistokes (at 37°C as measured by a glass viscometer) to about 20,000,000 centistokes. Preferably the polysiloxanes have a viscosity at 37°C ranging WO 00/69484 cA o23~302~ 2ooi-m-o2 pCT/US00/13842 from about 5 to about 5,000 centistokes, more preferably from about 5 to about 2,000 centistokes, most preferably from about 100 to about 1000 centistokes. High viscosity polysiloxanes which themselves are resistant to flowing can be effectively deposited upon the topsheet of the article by such methods as, for example, emulsifying the polysiloxane in surfactant or providing the polysiloxane in solution with the aid of a solvent, such as hexane, listed for exemplary purposes only. Particular methods for applying polysiloxane emollients onto the topsheet of the article are discussed in more detail hereinafter.
Preferred polysiloxanes compounds are disclosed in U.S. Patent 5,059,282 (Ampulski et al), issued October 22, 1991, which is incorporated herein by reference.
Particularly preferred polysiloxane compounds for use as emollients in the skin care compositions include phenyl-functional polymethylsiloxane compounds (e.g., Dow Corning 556 Cosmetic-Grade Fluid: polyphenylmethylsiloxane) and cetyl or stearyl functionalized dimethicones such as Dow 2502 and Dow 2503 polysiloxane fluids, respectively. In addition to such substitution with phenyl-functional or alkyl groups , effective substitution may be made with amino, carboxyl, hydroxyl, ether, polyether, aldehyde, ketone, amide, ester, and thiol groups. Of these effective substituent groups, the family of groups comprising phenyl, amino, alkyl, carboxyl, and hydroxyl groups are more preferred than the others; and phenyl-functional groups are most preferred.
Besides petrolatum emollient, fatty acid ester emollients, fatty acid ester ethoxylate emollients, alkyl ethoxylate emollients, fatty alcohol emollients, and polysiloxane compound emollients, the emollients can include minor amounts (e.g. up to about 10% of the total emollient) of other, conventional emollients. These other, conventional emollients include propylene glycol, glycerine, triethylene glycol, spermaceti or other waxes, fatty acids, and fatty alcohol ethers having from 12 to 28 carbon atoms . in their fatty chain, such as stearic acid, propoxylated fatty alcohols;
glycerides, acetoglycerides, and ethoxylated glycerides of C12-C2g fatty acids; other fatty esters of polyhydroxy alcohols; lanolin and its derivatives. These other emollients should be included in a manner such that the solid or semisolid characteristics of the skin care composition are maintained.
The amount of emollient that can be included in the skin care composition will depend on a variety of factors, including the particular emollient involved, the desirable benefits, the other components in the skin care composition and like factors.
2. Immobilizing Agent WO 00/69484 cA o23~302~ 2ooi-m-o2 PCT/US00/13842 Another key component of skin care compositions is immobilizing agents.
Immobilizing agents are capable of thickening emollients of skin care compositions.
Immobilizing agents may be soluble in emollients or insoluble in emollients.
Without wishing to be bound by the theory, it is believed that immobilizing agents form 5 microscopic networks in the skin care composition (e.g., emollient) to thicken the skin care composition. Herein, "microscopic network" refers to the network whose units are molecules of immobilizing agents being soluble in emollients, or particles of immobilizing agents being insoluble in emollients. Particularly, "microscopic network"
of immobilizing agents being soluble in emollients is sometimes referred to as "liquid 10 crystal". In the microscopic network, molecules or particles form flexible/weak connection among molecules or particles.
The immobilizing agent should be homogeneously dispersed in the skin care composition such that less amount of immobilizing agent is required to impart expected thickening. Less amount of immobilizing agent contained in the skin care composition 15 allows more amount of emollient, which is one of the actives for expected skin effects, in the skin care composition. The immobilizing agent homogeneously dispersed in the skin care composition also enables to control variability of the quality of the skin care composition. Preferably, the immobilizing agent has sufficient solubility or dispersability in the emollient. In most cases and preferred cases, the emollients are hydrophobic. In 20 this case the immobilizing agents should be also hydrophobic so that the emollient and the immobilizing agent can achieve a desired homogeneous mixture. The immobilizing agents and the emollients are sometimes compounded while both of them are molten.
The immobilizing agents being soluble in emollients can be selected from the group consisting of C 14-C24 fatty alcohols, C 12-C24 fatty acids, and C 12-C24 fatty 25 alcohol ethoxylates having an average degree of ethoxylation ranging from 2 to about 30, and mixtures thereof. Preferred immobilizing agents include C16-C24 fatty alcohols, more preferably C 1 g-C24 fatty alcohols. Representative examples include stearyl alcohol, arachidyl alcohol, behenyl alcohol, lignoceryl alcohol, and mixtures thereof.
Herein, "stearyl alcohol" refers to a mixtured fatty alcohol containing C 1 g fatty alcohol as 30 a major component. Herein, "arachidyl alcohol" refers to a mixtured fatty alcohol containing C20 fatty alcohol as a major component. Herein, "behenyl alcohol"
refers to a mixtured fatty alcohol containing C22 fatty alcohol as a major component.
Herein, "lignocaryl alcohol" refers to a mixtured fatty alcohol containing C24 fatty alcohol as a major component. Preferably, the immobilizing agent comprises behenyl alcohol.
Behenyl alcohol as the immobilizing agent preferably comprises C22 fatty alcohol as a WO 00/69484 cA o23~302~ 2ooi-ii-o2 PCT/US00/13842 major component and a minor quantity of C24 fatty alcohol. Behenyl alcohol may also comprise C 1 g fatty alcohol and C20 fatty alcohol. By containing a minor quantity of C24 fatty alcohol in behenyl alcohol, behenyl alcohol provides the emollients with more stability and more efficiently immobilizes the emollients of the skin care composition.
When behenyl alcohol comprises C 1 g fatty alcohol, C20 fatty alcohol, C22 fatty alcohol, and C24 fatty alcohol, the ratio of each component is preferably as follows:
from about 50 to about 99.99 % of C22 fatty alcohol, more preferably from about 63 % to about 84.9 of C22 fatty alcohol; from about 0.01 % to about 3 % of C24 fatty alcohol, more preferably from about 0.1 % to about 2 % of C24 fatty alcohol; from 0 % to about 27 % of C20 fatty alcohol, more preferably from about 10 % to about 20 % of C20 fatty alcohol;
from 0 % to about 20 % of C 1 g fatty alcohol, more preferably from about 5 %
to about 1 S
of C 1 g fatty alcohol. One of preferable behenyl alcohols as the immobilizing agent is Lanette 22 available from Henkel Corp. Cospha, 300 Brookside Avenue,Ambler, PA
19002.
Other preferred immobilizing agents include C16-C24 fatty acids, more preferably Clg-C24 fatty acids selected from the group consisting of stearic acid, behenic acid and mixtures thereof. Behenic acid is most preferred. Still other preferred immobilizing agents include C16-C24 fatty alcohol ethoxylates having an average degree of ethoxylation ranging from about 5 to about 20. Preferably, the fatty alcohols, fatty acids and fatty alcohols are linear and do not contain branched isomers.
Importantly, these preferred immobilizing agents such as the C 1 g-C24 fatty alcohols are assumed to provide the microscopic network in the skin care composition, thereby resulting in the skin care composition which is far thicker than only the emollients which are included in the skin care composition. These preferred immobilizing agents such as Clg-C24 fatty alcohols are soluble enough to form homogeneous mixtures of the emollients and the immobilizing agents.
Other types of immobilizing agents being soluble in emollients can be used either alone or in combination with the fatty alcohols, fatty acids, and fatty alcohol ethoxylates described above. Examples of these other types of immobilizing agents includes polyhydroxy fatty acid esters, polyhydroxy fatty acid amides, and mixtures thereof.
Preferred esters and amides will have three or more free hydroxy groups on the polyhydroxy moiety and are typically nonionic in character. Because of the possible skin sensitivity of those using article topsheets to which the skin care composition is applied, these esters and amides should also be relatively mild and non-irntating to the skin.
WO 00/69484 cA o23~302~ 2ooi-m-o2 PCT/US00/13842 Suitable polyhydroxy fatty acid esters will have the formula:
O
II
R- C -O Y
- n wherein R is a CS-C31 hydrocarbyl group, preferably straight chain C~-C19 alkyl or alkenyl, more preferably straight chain Cg-C1~ alkyl or alkenyl, most preferably straight chain C11-Cl~ alkyl or alkenyl, or mixture thereof; Y is a polyhydroxyhydrocarbyl moiety having a hydrocarbyl chain with at least 2 free hydroxyls directly connected to the chain; and n is at least 1. Suitable Y groups can be derived from polyols such as glycerol, pentaerythritol; sugars such as raffinose, maltodextrose, galactose, sucrose, glucose, xylose, fructose, maltose, lactose, mannose and erythrose; sugar alcohols such as erythritol, xylitol, malitol, mannitol and sorbitol; and anhydrides of sugar alcohols such as sorbitan.
One class of suitable polyhydroxy fatty acid esters comprises certain sorbitan esters, preferably the sorbitan esters of C16-C22 saturated fatty acids.
Because of the manner in which they are typically manufactured, these sorbitan esters usually comprise mixtures of mono-, di-, tri-, etc. esters. Representative examples of suitable sorbitan esters include sorbitan palinitates (e.g., SPAN 40), sorbitan steaibt~~s (e.g., SPAN 60), and sorbitan behenates, that comprise one or more of the mono-, di- and tri-ester versions of these sorbitan esters, e.g., sorbitan mono-, di- and tri-palmitate, sorbitan mono-, di- and tri-stearate, sorbitan mono-, di and tri-behenate, as well as mixed tallow fatty acid sorbitan mono-, di- and tri-esters. Mixtures of different sorbitan esters can also be used, such as sorbitan palmitates with sorbitan stearates. Particularly preferred sorbitan esters are the sorbitan stearates, typically as a mixture of mono-, di- and tri-esters (plus some tetraester) such as SPAN 60, and sorbitan stearates sold under the trade name GLYCOMUL-S by Lonza, Inc. Although these sorbitan esters typically contain mixtures of mono-, di- and tri-esters, plus some tetraester, the mono- and di-esters are usually the predominant species in these mixtures.
Another class of suitable polyhydroxy fatty acid esters comprises certain glyceryl monoesters, preferably glyceryl monoesters of C16-C24 saturated fatty acids such as glyceryl monostearate, glyceryl monopalmitate, and glyceryl monobehenate.
Again, like the sorbitan esters, glyceryl monoester mixtures will typically contain some di- and WO 00/69484 cA o23~302~ 2ooi-ii-o2 PCT/US00/13842 triester. However, such mixtures should contain predominantly the glyceryl monoester species to be useful.
Another class of suitable polyhydroxy fatty acid esters comprises certain sucrose fatty acid esters, preferably the C12-C24 saturated fatty acid esters of sucrose. Sucrose monoesters and diesters are particularly preferred and include sucrose mono-and di-stearate and sucrose mono- and di- laurate.
Suitable polyhydroxy fatty acid amides will have the formula:
O R~
II I
wherein Rl is H, Cl-C4 hydrocarbyl, 2-hydroxyethyl, 2-hydroxypropyl, methoxyethyl, methoxypropyl or a mixture thereof, preferably Cl-C4 alkyl, methoxyethyl or methoxypropyl, more preferably C 1 or C2 alkyl or methoxypropyl , most preferably C 1 alkyl (i.e., methyl) or methoxypropyl; and R2 is a CS-C31 hydrocarbyl group, preferably straight chain C7-C 1 g alkyl or alkenyl, more preferably straight chain Cg-C
17 alkyl or alkenyl, most preferably straight chain C11-C17 alkyl or alkenyl, or mixture thereof; and Z is a polyhydroxyhydrocarbyl moiety having a linear hydrocarbyl chain with at least 3 hydroxyls directly connected to the chain. See U.S. patent 5,174, 927 (Honsa), issued December 29, 1992 (herein incorporated by reference) which discloses these polyhydroxy fatty acid amides, as well as their preparation.
The Z moiety preferably will be derived from a reducing sugar in a reductive amination reaction; most preferably glycityl. Suitable reducing sugars include glucose, fructose, maltose, lactose, galactose, mannose, and xylose. High dextrose corn syrup, high fructose corn syrup, and high maltose corn syrup can be utilized, as well as the individual sugars listed above. These corn syrups can yield mixtures of sugar components for the Z moiety.
The Z moiety preferably will be selected from the group consisting of -CH2_ (CHOH)n-CH20H, -CH(CH20H)-[(CHOH)n-1]-CH20H, -CH20H-CH2-(CHOH)2(CHOR3)(CHOH)-CH20H, where n is an integer from 3 to 5, and R3 is H or a cyclic or aliphatic monosaccharide. Most preferred are the glycityls where n is 4, particularly -CH2-(CHOH)4-CH20H.
WO 00/69484 cA o23~302~ 2ooi-m-o2 PCT/US00/13842 In the above formula, R1 can be, for example, N-methyl, N-ethyl, N-propyl, N-isopropyl, N-butyl, N-2-hydroxyethyl, N-methoxypropyl or N-2-hydroxypropyl,.
R2 can be selected to provide, for example, cocamides, stearamides, oleamides, lauramides, myristamides, capricamides, palmitamides, tallowamides, etc. The Z moiety can be 1-deoxyglucityl, 2-deoxyfructityl, 1-deoxymaltityl, 1-deoxylactityl, 1-deoxygalactityl, 1-deoxymannityl, 1-deoxymaltotriotityl, etc.
The most preferred polyhydroxy fatty acid amides have the general formula:
O R~ OH
II I I
wherein R1 is methyl or methoxypropyl; R2 is a C11-Cl~ straight-chain alkyl or alkenyl group. These include N-lauryl-N-methyl glucamide, N-lauryl-N-methoxypropyl glucamide, N-cocoyl-N-methyl glucamide, N-cocoyl-N-methoxypropyl glucamide, N-palmityl-N-methoxypropyl glucamide, N-tallowyl-N-methyl glucamide, or N-tallowyl-N-methoxypropyl glucamide.
As previously noted, some of the immobilizing agents require an emulsifier for solubilization in the emollient. This is particularly the case for certain of the glucamides such as the N-alkyl-N-methoxypropyl glucamides having HLB values of at least about 7.
Suitable emulsifiers will typically include those having HLB values below about 7. In this regard, the sorbitan esters previously described, such as the sorbitan stearates, having HLB values of about 4.9 or less have been found useful in solubilizing these glucamide immobilizing agents in petrolatum. Other suitable emulsifiers include steareth-(polyethylene glycol ethers of stearyl alcohol that conform to the formula CH3(CH2)l~(OCH2CH2)nOH, where n has an average value of 2), sorbitan tristearate, isosorbide laurate, and glyceryl monostearate. The emulsifier can be included in an amount sufficient to solubilize the immobilizing agent in the emollient such that a substantially homogeneous mixture is obtained. For example, an approximately 1:1 mixture of N-cocoyl-N-methyl glucamide and petrolatum that will normally not melt into a single phase mixture, will melt into a single phase mixture upon the addition of 20% of a 1:l mixture of Steareth-2 and sorbitan tristearate as the emulsifier.
Other types of ingredients being soluble in emollients that can be used as immobilizing agents, either alone, or in combination with the above-mentioned WO 00/69484 cA o23~302~ 2ooi-ii-o2 pCT/US00/13842 immobilizing agents, include waxes such as carnauba wax, beeswax, candelilla wax, paraffin wax, microcrystalline wax, castol wax, ceresin, esparto, ouricuri, rezowax, polyethylene wax, and other known waxes. Preferably the wax is a microcrystalline wax.
An example of a particularly preferred microcrystalline wax is Multiwax W-835, Witco 5 Corporation, One American Lane, Greenwich, CT06831-2559.
The immobilizing agents being insoluble in emollients are particulate thickeners.
Herein "particulate thickener" means the immobilizing agent being in the form of small, finely divided particles. The particulate thickener is able to enhance smooth feeling or lubricant effect of the skin care composition because of its particle structure. For 10 example, fumed silica is so spherical like a "ball" that it can act as a bearing, when shear force is applied, resulting in a lubricant effect. Bentonite or hectorite consists of a plurality of thin layers which can slide easily thus resulting in smooth feeling. The average diameter or the corresponding average diameter may be less than about microns, preferably less than about 20 microns, more preferably less than about 10 15 microns. When the particle has a different shape from a sphere, the corresponding diameter of the non-spherical particle can be represented by a diameter of a sphere having the same volume as the non-spherical particle. The corresponding diameter can be measured by Laser Particle Analyzer supplied by Honeywell Inc., Honeywell Plaza, Minneapolis, MN, under the designation of Microtrac X-100.
20 The particulate thickener is essentially insoluble in the emollient but can be dispersed forming the microscopic network therein and provide a solid structure for the emollient. The particulate thickener can be selected from the group consisting of silica, treated silica, fumed silica, polyrnethacrylate polymers, polymethacrylate and styrene copolymers, calicum silicate, treated calcium silicate, treated bentonite, treated hectorite, 25 and mixtures thereof. A preferred particulate thickener for use herein is fumed silica.
More preferred for use herein is surface-treated fumed silica. Even more preferred is a fumed silica selected from the group consisting of polyalkylsiloxane treated fumed silica, trialkylsilanized fumed silica, dialkyldisilanized fumed silica, and mixtures thereof. Most preferred is a fumed silica selected from the group consisting of polydimethylsiloxane 30 treated fumed silica, trimethylsilanized fumed silica, dimethyldisilanized finned silica, and mixtures thereof.
Silica is also known as silicon dioxide or silicic anhydride, which can be represented by the chemical formula Si02. A variety of different types of silicas which are useful herein, are known fumed or arced silica, precipitated silica, silica gel, WO 00/69484 cA o23~302~ 2ooi-ii-o2 PCT/US00/13842 amorphous silica, and silica sols and colloids. Fumed silica, which is also known as arced silica, is produced by the vapor phase hydrolysis of silicon tetrachloride in a hydrogen oxygen flame. Without being limited by theory, it is believed that the combustion process creates silicon dioxide molecules which condense to form particles. The particles collide, attach and sinter together. The result of this process is a three dimensional branched chain aggregate. Once the aggregate cools below the fusion point of silica, which is about 1710° C., further collisions result in mechanical entanglement of the chains to form agglomerates. Precipitated silicas and silica gels are generally made in aqueous solution.
Amorphous silicas are generally naturally occurring microcrystalline forms of the material. Silica sols and colloids are dispersions of amorphous silica in an aqueous solution The fumed silica and treated fumed silica preferably have a mean particle size for the agglomerates, i.e., a mean agglomerate particle size, of from about 0.1 microns to about 100 microns, preferably from about 1 micron to about 50 microns, and more preferably from about 10 microns to about 30 microns. The agglomerates are composed of aggregates which having a mean particle size, i.e., a mean aggregate particle size, from about 0.01 microns to about 1 S microns, preferably from about 0.05 microns to about 10 microns, more preferably from about 0.1 microns to about 5 microns, and most preferably from about 0.2 microns to about 0.3 microns.
The fumed silica agglomerates typically have active hydroxyl groups. It is desirable to treat these fumed silicas to render the hydroxyl gro4.r~s less reactive especially when the emollient in the skin care composition is hydrophobic. A useful method of treatment is to coat the fumed silica with a nonpolar organic compound to render the active hydroxyl groups less reactive. Preferred organic compounds for treatment include polyalkylsiloxanes, with polydimethylsiloxanes being most preferred. A
commercially available polydimethylsiloxane treated fumed silicas useful herein are sold under the trade name CAB-O-Sil~ TS-720 by Cabot Corporation, Tuscola, IL, or Aerosil 8972 by Degussa AG, Germany, both of which have a surface area of around 120 mZ/g and a bulk density of 50 g/L. Another useful method of treatment is to chemically react the hydroxyl groups of the fumed silica with a silanizing agent, e.g., diemthyldichlorosiliane or hexamethyldisilizane. In these chemically treated silicas, the free hydroxyl groups of the silica are replaced with an oxygen-silicon bond of the silanizing agent. A
commercially available trimethyl silanized fumed silica is sold under the trade name CAB-0-Sil~ TS-530, by Cabot Corporation, Tuscola, IL, which has a surface area of about 220 mz/g and a bulk density of SO g/L. A commercially available dimethyldisilanized fumed silica is sold WO 00/69484 cA o23~302~ 2ooi-m-o2 PCT/US00/13842 under the trade name CAB-O-SIL~ TS-610, by Cabot Corporation, Tuscola, IL, which has a surface area of about 120 m2/g and a bulk density of 50 g/L.
The particulate thickeners also useful herein are polymethacrylate polymers and polymethacrylate and styrene copolymers. These materials are swellable polymers which are useful for absorbing liquid compositions to provide a thickening or gelling effect on the liquid. The polymethacrylate polymers are homopolymers of methacrylic acid esters, preferably the methyl or ethyl esters, which are optionally crosslinked with any of the common crosslinking agents. The polymethacrylate and styrene copolymers are copolymers of methacrylic acid esters, preferably the methyl or ethyl esters, withstyrene, which are optionally crosslinked with any of the common crosslinking agents.
The crosslinking agent is most typically a material containing two or more unsaturated functional groups. The crosslinking agent is reacted with the monomer units of the polymer or copolymer and is incorporated into the polymer thereby forming links or covalent bonds between two or more individual polymer chains or between two or more sections of the same polymer chain. Non limiting examples of suitable crosslinking agents include those selected from the group consisting of methylenebisacrylamides, diallyldialkyl ammonium halides, polyalkenyl polyethers of polyhydric alcohols, allyl acrylates, vinyloxyalkylacrylates, and polyfunctional vinylidenes. Specific examples of crosslinking agents useful herein include those selected from the group consisting of methylenebisacrylamide, ethylene glycol di-(meth)acrylate, di-(meth)acrylamide, cyanomethylacrylate, vinyloxyethylacrylate, vinyloxyethylmethacrylate, allyl pentaerythritol, trimethylolpropane diallylether, allyl sucrose, butadiene, isoprene, divinyl benzene, divinyl naphthalene, ethyl vinyl ether, methyl vinyl ether, and allyl acrylate.
Other crosslinkers include formaldehyde and glyoxal. A particularly useful crosslinked polymethacrylate polymer is sold under the trade name Polytrap~6603, by Dow Corning Corp., Midland, Mich.
The particulate thickeners also useful herein are treated bentonites and treated hectorites. Bentonite is a colloidal aluminum silicate clay. Hectorite is a clay containing sodium, magnesium, lithium silicon, oxygen, hydrogen, and fluorine. Useful herein especially when the emollient in the skin care composition is hydrophobic are bentonites and hectorites that have been treated with various organic compounds to render the clays less polar. Herein "treated" means that these materials have been coated with the organic compound. Non limiting examples of treated bentones include stearalkonium hectorite;
quaternium-18 bentonite; quaternium-18 hectorite; castor oil and stearalkonium hectorite and propylene carbonate; isopropyl myristate and stearalkonium hectorie and propylene WO 00/69484 cA o23~302~ 2ooi-m-o2 PCT/L1S00/13842 carbonate; isododecane and quaternium-18 hectorite and propylene carbonate;
lanolin oil and isopropyl palmitate and stearalkonium hectorite and propylene carbonate and propylparaben; propylene glycol dicaprylate/dicaprate and stearalkonium hectorite and propylene carbonate; mineral oil and quaternium-18 hectorite and propylene carbonate;
mineral oil and quaternium-18 hectorite and SD alcohol 40; petroleum distillates and quaternium-18 hectorite and propylene carbonate; C12-15 alkyl bnezoate and stearalknoium hectorite and propylene carbonate; cyclomethicone and quaternium-hectorite and SD alcohol 40; cyclomethicone and quaternium-18 hectorite and propylene carbonate; and mixtures thereof.
The particulate thickeners also useful herein are calcium silicate and treated calcium silicate. Common forms of calcium silicate include CaSi03, CaSi04, and CaSi05. These materials are also known as calcium salts of silicic acid. The calcium silicates can be treated with a wide variety of nonpolar organic compounds to make the materials more hydrophobic. Useful calcium silicates include the following commercially available materials: Hubersorb (Huber Corp., Harve de Grace, Md.), and Micro-Cel C, Micro-Cel E, and Micro-Cel T-38 (Celite Corp., Denver, Colo.) Most of all the particulate thickeners above can be easily dispersed in the emollient in the skin care composition thanks to the surface treatments.
Instead of the surface treatments or in combination of the treatments some emulsifiers are sometimes useful.
The amount of immobilizing agents that can be included in the skin care composition will depend on a variety of factors.
3. Skin Care Active Ingredients Various skin care active ingredients may be incorporated in the skin care composition. These skin care actives preferably provides skin care benefits.
These active ingredients include, but not limited to, skin care agents, proton donating agents, enzyme inhibitors, or mixtures thereof. The skin care composition of the present allows to reduce the initial amount of the skin care active ingredients incorporated because of less migration in storage or transportation while delivering effective amount of skin care active ingredients to the skin in use.
The skin care agents may be added to deliver a therapeutic and/or skin protective benefit. It will be recognized that of the numerous materials useful in the skin care WO 00/69484 cA o23~302~ 2ooi-m-o2 PCT/US00/13842 compositions delivered to skin, those that have been deemed safe and effective skin care agent and mixtures thereof are logical materials for use herein. Such materials include Category I actives as defined by the U.S. Food and Drug Administration's (FDA) Tentative Final Monograph on Skin Protectant Drug Products for Over-the-Counter Human Use (21 C.F.R. ~ 347), which presently include: allantoin, aluminum hydroxide gel, calamine, cocoa butter, dimethicone, cod liver oil (in combination), glycerine, kaolin, petrolatum, lanolin, mineral oil, shark liver oil, white petrolatum, talc, topical starch, zinc acetate, zinc carbonate, zinc oxide, and the like. Other potentially useful materials are Category III actives as defined by the U.S. Food and Drug Administration's Tentative Final Monograph on Skin Protectant Drug Products for Over-the-Counter Human Use (21 C.F.R. ~ 347), which presently include: live yeast cell derivatives, aldioxa, aluminum acetate, microporous cellulose, cholecalciferol, colloidal oatmeal, cysteine hydrochloride, dexpanthenol, Peruvean balsam oil, protein hydrolysates, racemic methionine, sodium bicarbonate, Vitamin A, buffered mixture of cation and anion exchange resins, corn starch, trolamine, and the like. Further, other potential materials are Category II actives as defined by the U.S. Food and Drug Administration's Tentative Final Monograph on Skin Protectant Drug Products for Over-the-Counter Human Use (21 C.F.R. ~ 347), which include: bizmuth subnitrate, boric acid, ferric chloride, polyvinyl pyrrolidone - vinyl acetate copolymers, sulfur, tannic acid, and the like. The skin care agent may be selected from these materials and mixtures thereof. As mentioned above, the materials for use should be safe.
The skin care composition may include between about 0.001 % and about SO % of the skin care agent. The concentration range of the skin care agents in the skin care composition varies from material to material. Below table shows preferred skin care agents for use and its concentration ranges in the skin care composition.
Possible concentrationPreferred concentration range (%) range (%) allantoin 0.2 - S 0.5 - 2 aluminum hydroxide 0.1 - 10 0.1 S - S
gel calamine 0.2 - 40 1 - 25 WO 00/69484 cA o23~302~ 2ooi-ii-o2 pCT/US00/13842 cocoa butter 30 - SO 40 - 50 dimethicone 0.2 - 40 1 - 30 glycerine 5 - 50 20 - 45 kaolin 2 - 30 4 - 20 petrolatum 30 - 50 40 - 50 shark liver oil 0.1 - 10 1 - 5 white petrolatum 30 - 50 40 - SO
zinc acetate 0.05 - 10 0.1 - 2 zinc carbonate 0.05 - 10 0.2 - 2 zinc oxide 0.1 - 25 0.3 - 8 It should be understood that the skin care composition may include the materials listed above beyond its range. For example, when the skin care composition comprises 40 of petrolatum as an emollient and 50 % of petrolatum as an skin care agent (another 10 may be immobilizing agent), 90 % of the skin care composition may be petrolatum.
5 Many of the FDA monographed skin care agents are currently utilized in commercially available skin care products, such as A and D~ Ointment, Vaseline~
Petroleum Jelly, Desitin~ Diaper Rash Ointment and Daily Care~ ointment, Gold Bond ~ Medicated Baby Powder, Aquaphor~ Healing Ointment, Baby Magic~ Baby Lotion, Johnson's Ultra Sensitive~ Baby Cream. Those skin case ingredients and/or products 10 may be incorporated to create treated articles.
The proton donating actives may be added to help maintain a wearer's skin at its natural acidic pH. For example such proton donating actives can be effective in neutralizing any high pH (i.e. >7) components of bodily exudates. Chemically suitable proton donating actives are effective in helping maintain skin pH in at least a slightly 15 acidic condition. A non limiting and exemplary listing of proton donating actives includes: monomeric organic acids; acid salts of organic or inorganic acids;
and polymeric organic acids and salts thereof. Certain combinations of an acid and a salt thereof, commonly known as buffers, are also suitable as long as an aqueous solution of the WO 00/69484 cA o23~302~ 2ooi-m-o2 PCT/US00/13842 acid/salt combination has a pH less than 7. A suitable acid or acid salt should have at least one pKa between about 2.0 and about 6.5. The preferred range of pKa values for suitable proton donating actives is between about 2.5 and about 5Ø Preferred proton donating actives include pharmaceutically acceptable monomeric and polymeric organic acids.
Exemplary monomeric organic acids suitable for use include: citric, malic, adipic, glutaric, lactic, sorbic, salicylic, tartaric, malefic, fumaric, malonic, glycolic, and succinic acids.
Exemplary organic polymeric acids include: acidic vinyl polymers, for example, homopolymers of unsaturated carboxylic acid and anhydride monomers such as acrylic acid itself, methacrylic acid, a-chloroacrylic acid, a-cyanoacrylic acid, (3-methylacrylic acid (crotonic acid), a-phenylacrylic acid, (3-acryloxypropionic acid, sorbic acid, a-chlorosorbic acid, angelic acid, cinnamic acid, p-chlorocinnamic acid, (3-stearylacrylic acid, itaconic acid, citraconic acid, mesaconic acid, glutaconic acid, aconitic acid, malefic acid, fumaric acid, tricarboxyethylene, and malefic anhydride, copolymers of unsaturated monomeric acids with suitable co-monomers, and partially neutralized salts of such polymers; acidic cellulose derivatives, such as carboxymethyl cellulose at least partially wherein the cellulose derivatives are at least partially protonated, cellulose phosphate, and oxidized cellulose; and cation exchange resins wherein the cation exchange resin is at least partially protonated.
Exemplary inorganic acid salts include alkali metal monohydrogen phosphates, blends of alkali metal monohydrogen and dihydrogen phosphate salts, alkali metal monohydrogen pyrophosphate salts, and blends of alkali metal monohydrogen and dihydrogen pyrophosphate salts.
Materials which can decompose in the environment adjacent to a wearer's skin into a proton donating active are also suitable for use. For example, esterase enzymes in feces (e.g. fecal lipases) can hydrolyze certain esters to provide a proton donating active.
Suitable proton donating actives of this type have the formula:
WO 00/69484 cA o23~302~ 2ooi-m-o2 PCT/US00/13842 H O
- -O
- --O
H
wherein R1, R2 and R3 are independently hydrogen, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, or a hydroxyalkyl group with from 1 to 4 carbon atoms. An exemplary ester of this type is triacetin.
In order that the proton donating active be effective in helping maintain skin at an acidic pH the proton donating active should be provided at a level of at least 0.01 % of the skin care composition; typically at least about 0.5%; preferably at least about 3%. Such suitable proton donating actives may be used as a component of the skin care compositions at a level of between about 0.01 % and about 40%, depending on the specific proton donating active chosen. Preferably, the proton donating actives are used at a level of between about 0.5% and about 20% of the skin care composition. In particularly preferred embodiments, the proton donating actives are provided at a level of between about 3% and about 7%.
These and other features of proton donating actives are disclosed in U.S.
Patent Application Serial No. 09/041509 entitled "Proton Donating Actives in Absorbent Articles" filed in the name of McOsker, et al. on March 12, 1998, which is incorporated herein by reference.
The inhibitors against enzymes may be added to be available at the skin/urine, skin/feces, skin/menses interfaces to inhibit enzymatic activity on the skin and to reduce or prevent the occurrence of inflammation. Inhibitors of enzyme activity are well known and are typically classified as competitive inhibitors (which compete with the substrate for binding at the active site on the enzyme) and non-competitive inhibitors (which bind to a site other than the active site to inactivate the enzyme). Many enzymes, such as metalloproteases, are inhibited by substances that bind with a metal group on th'~ enzyme.
Chelating agents are effective inhibitors of other enzymes that require the presence of metal ions, such as the ions of calcium, cobalt, copper, magnesium, manganese, sodium, potassium, or zinc, for activation. Since enzymes are proteins, antibodies raised against specific enzymes are also effective enzyme inhibitors.
WO 00/69484 cA o23~302~ 2ooi-m-o2 PCT/US00/13842 Enzyme inhibitors useful in the absorbent articles described herein will typically have an ICSO value of not more than about 500 ~M, more typically not more than about 250 p,M, and still more typically not more than about 100 ~M. As used herein, the term "ICSp"means the inhibitory concentration (e.g., a micromolar concentration, ~,M) of a substance (inhibitor) which reduces the rate of substrate cleavage by an enzyme by 50%.
The ICSp is calculated according to the equation ICSp =[I]/[(v/v;)-1], where [I] is the inhibitor concentration tested, v is the rate of substrate cleavage in the absence of the inhibitor and v; is the rate of substrate cleavage in the presence of the inhibitor. The ICSp of an enzyme inhibitor may be measured by a Purified Enzyme method or by a Fecal Enzyme method which is described in U.S. Patent Application Serial No. 09/041266 entitled "Disposable Absorbent Article Having A Skin Care Composition Containing An Enzyme Inhibitor" filed in the name of Roe, et al. on March 12, 1998. It will be understood that certain enzyme inhibitors (e.g., EDTA) will have higher ICSO values but will still be useful in the absorbent articles described herein. For materials for which the molecular weight cannot be determined, such materials will typically reduce enzyme activity by at least 50% at a concentration in the skin care composition of not more than about 5 percent by weight.
Without limitation, any type of enzyme inhibitor may be employed in the skin care compositions transferable to the wearer's skin, including any naturally occurnng inhibitor of plant, microbial and/or animal origin (including human) and synthetically manufactured chemical inhibitor. The enzyme inhibitors may be hydrophilic or hydophobic in nature and may thus be water soluble or soluble in a hydrophobic vehicle. The enzyme inhibitors are preferably present in the skin care composition in a concentration of about 0.001 % to about 50% by weight, typically about 0.01 % to about 25%, more typically about 0.1 % to about 10%, and most typically about 0.1 % to about 5 %. Because of the variety of enzyme inhibitors employed, the effective concentration of each inhibitor must be separately determined, as known to those skilled in the art.
The enzyme inhibitors may be employed singly or as a mixture of enzyme inhibitors such as a "cocktail" of inhibitors in a single absorbent article.
Moreover, different enzyme inhibitors may be employed in skin care compositions in different locations in a single absorbent article.
Because of the wide diversity of enzymes present in body exudates, it is reasonably predictable that materials such as those described below which inhibit certain classes of enzymes (e.g., proteases) may also inhibit enzymes which cleave substrates other than those specified (e.g., proteins and peptides). Hence, inhibitors which inhibit WO 00/69484 cA o23~302~ 2ooi-m-o2 PCT/US00/13842 proteases may also inhibit lipases and other esterases, amylases and/or ureases and vice versa.
Inhibitors of enzymes and/or coenzymes most frequently found in body exudates are preferred in the skin care compositions. Thus, the enzyme inhibitors are preferably inhibitors of proteolytic enzymes such as trypsin, chymotrypsin, aminopeptidase and elastase; lipases; bile salts; amylases; and/or ureases.
Exemplary suitable inhibitors of proteases for use that are believed to inhibit the type of protease indicated in parentheses include, but are not limited to, soybean trypsin inhibitor and other plant-derived trypsin inhibitors such as lima bean protease inhibitor, com protease inhibitor and the like; Bowman-Birk inhibitor (serine, trypsin-like protease inhibitor); pancreatic trypsin inhibitor such as bovine pancreatic basic trypsin inhibitor and other animal-derived pancreatic trypsin inhibitors; egg white trypsin inhibitor (serine, trypsin-like protease inhibitor); ovomucoids containing ovoinhibitors such as from chicken or turkey egg white (trypsin and chymotrypsin inhibitors); chymostatin (serine, chymotrypsin-like protease inhibitor); aprotinin (serine protease inhibitor);
leupeptin and its analogs such as propionyl-leupeptin, N-a-t-BOC-deacetylleupeptin (serine and cysteine protease inhibitor); bestatin and its analogs such as epibestatin and nitrobestatin (aminopeptidase metalloprotease inhibitor); amastatin and its analogs such as epiamastatin (aminopeptidase inhibitor); antipain (trypsin inhibitor); antithrombin III
(serine protease inhibitor); hirudin (thrombin-like serine protease inhibitor); cystatin (egg white cysteine protease inhibitor); E-64 (trans-epoxysuccinyl-L-leucylamido-(4-~~.aanidino)-butane) and its analogs (cysteine protease inhibitor); a2-macroglobulin (universal endoprotease inhibitor);
al-antitrypsin (trypsin inhibitor); pepstatin and its analogs such as acetyl pepstatin, pepstatin A, Nle-Sta-Ala-Sta (aspartyl protease inhibitor); apstatin (aminopeptidase P
inhibitor); (2R)-2-mercaptomethyl-4-methylpentanoyl-b-(2-naphthyl)-Ala-Ala amide (matrix metalloprotease inhibitor); (2R)-2-mercaptomethyl-4-methylpentanoyl-Phe-Ala amide (matrix metalloprotease inhibitor); N-acetyl-Leu-Leu-methioninal (calpain inhibitor);
N-acetyl-Leu-Leu-norleucinal (calpain inhibitor); p-aminobenzyol-Gly-Pro-D-Leu-D-Ala hydroxamic acid (matrix metalloprotease inhibitor); 2(R)-[N-(4-methoxyphenylsulfonyl)-N-(3-pyridylmethyl)amino]-3-methylbutano-hydroxamic acid (metalloprotease inhibitor); L-1-chloro-3-[4-tosylamido]-7-amino-2-heptanone-HCl (TLCK), L-1-chloro-3-[4-tosylamido]-4-phenyl-2-butanone (TPCK), tranexamic acid, glycyrrhizic acid, 18-(3-glycyrrhetinic acid, colloidal oat extracts, elhibin, zinc salts, iodoacetate, phenylmethylsulfonyl fluoride, phosphoramidon, 4-(2-aminoethyl)-benzenesulfonylfluoride HCI, 3,4-dichloroiso-coumarin, quercetin, and the like, and mixtures thereof.
WO 00/69484 cA o23~302~ 2ooi-m-o2 PCT/US00/13842 Chelating agents have also been found to be useful as inhibitors of both proteases and ureases at a concentration of about 0.1 % to about 2%. Exemplary chelating agents are phytic acid, nitrilotriacetic acid, EDTA, diethylene triamino pentacetic acid, hyroxyethyl ethylene diamine triacetic acid, and the corresponding acid salts, disclosed in 5 U.S. Patent No. 5,091,193 issued to Enjolras on February 25, 1992, the disclosure of which is hereby incorporated by reference.
Among preferred protease inhibitors are compounds that exhibit inhibitory activity that is not necessarily restricted to a single class of proteases. Such compounds include, but are not limited to, hexamidine and its salts; pentamidine and its salts;
benzamidine, p-10 aminobenzamidine and their derivatives; and guanidinobenzoic acid and its derivatives such as those disclosed in U.S. Patent No. 5,376,655 issued to Imaki et al. on December 27, 1994, the disclosure of which is hereby incorporated by reference. Other preferred protease inhibitors include polymer derivatives of guanidinobenzoic acid disclosed and made in U.S.
Patent Application Serial No. 09/041196 entitled "Enzyme Inhibitors" filed in the name of 15 Mclver, et al. on March 12, 1998, the disclosure of which is hereby incorporated by reference.
Protease inhibitors that are preferred in the practice are soybean trypsin inhibitor, aprotinin, hexamidine (e.g., hexamidine diisethionate), p-aminobenzamidine, leupeptin, pepstatin A, chymostatin and polymer derivatives of guanidinobenzoic acid (disclosed and 20 made in U.S. Patent Application Serial No. 09/041196 entitled "Enzyme Inhibitors"
incorporated by reference above). Particularly preferred protease inhibitors are soybean trypsin inhibitor, hexamidine, p-aminobenzamidine and the foregoing polymer derivatives of guanidinobenzoic acid.
Ureases are known to be inhibited in the presence of trace amounts of heavy metal 25 ions, such as those of silver, copper, and the like. Thus, trace amounts (as little as 0.001 or less) of salts of these metals are useful as unease inhibitors. Other exemplary inhibitors of unease activity include, but are not limited to, acetyl hydroxamic acid and its derivatives, such as cinnamoyl hydroxamic acid and other alkyl hydroxamic acids;
phosphoramidate and its derivatives. Such compounds are competitive inhibitors of 30 unease at a concentration of about 2 micromolar (~M). Chelating agents have also been found to be useful as inhibitors of both proteases and ureases at a concentration of about 0.1% to about 2%. Exemplary chelating agents are phytic acid, nitrilotriacetic acid, ethylenediamine tetraacetic acid (EDTA), diethylene triamino pentacetic acid, hyroxyethyl ethylene diamine triacetic acid, and the corresponding acid salts, disclosed in U.S. Patent 35 No. 5,091,193 incorporated by reference above. Other unease inhibiting compounds are WO 00/69484 cA o23~302~ 2ooi-ii-o2 pCT/US00/13842 disclosed in U.S. Patent 3,935,862 issued to Kraskin on February 3, 1976, the disclosure of which is hereby incorporated by reference, and include amino acid compounds, such as hydroxyalkylamino acids, sulfhydryl amino acids, aminosulfonic acids, aminophosphonic acid compounds and ether amino acids such as methoxyethyliminodiacetic acid, ethylene-bis-(oxypropylaminodiacetic acid), ethylene-bis-(oxyethyliminodiacetic acid), amino-methyl phosphonic acid (N,N-diacetic acid), and the like, and aminopolycarboxylic acid compounds. including acids and salts diethylenetri-aminepentaacetic acid (DTPA), N-hydroxy-ethylethylenediaminetriacetic acid (HEDTA), and the like.
Other suitable inhibitors of urease are disclosed in U.S. Patent No. 5,409,903 issued to Polak et al. on April 25, 1995, the disclosure of which is hereby incorporated by reference. This patent discloses dibasic magnesium phosphate, dialdehyde polysaccharides and zeolite, used alone in combination with each other or with the calcium compounds, calcium acetate, calcium chloride, calcium gluconate and calcium lactate as well as the magnesium compounds, magnesium chloride and magnesium citrate, for inhibition of ureases.
Suitable lipase inhibitors include, but are not limited to, water soluble salts of metals, such as cadmium, cobalt, copper, iron, molybdenum, silver, lanthanum, tin and zinc. Exemplary lipase inhibiting compounds are disclosed in U.S. Patent 4,556,560, hereby incorporated by reference, and include zinc chloride, zinc acetate, zinc nitrate trihydrate, zinc nitrate hexahydrate, zinc sulfate, zinc sulfate heptahydrate, zinc sulfate hexahydrate, iron(II) chloride, iron(I~ chloride tetrahydrate, iron(Ill) chloride, iron(>TI) chloride monohydrate, iron(IB) chloride hexahydrate, iron(II) lactate, iron(>~
lactate, iron(I>I) malate, iron(I>] nitrate, iron( nitrate hexahydrate, iron(III) nitrate-9Hz0, iron(II) sulfate and its hydrates, iron(BI) sulfate and its hydrates, copper sulfate pentahydrate, tin chloride, cobalt chloride and lanthanum chloride, zinc salts of both saturated and unsaturated monocarboxylic acids having about 6 to about 12 carbon atoms, block copolymers of propylene oxide and ethylene oxide (e.g., marketed as Pluronic~ and Tetronic~ by BASF Corp.), glycerol triesters of fatty acids having from about 2 to about 20 carbons such as triacetin, and the like. Other useful lipase inhibitors are disclosed in U.S. Patent 5,091,193, hereby incorporated by reference, and include esters of fatty alcohols, such as saturated or unsaturated, linear or branched alkyl acetate, lactate or propionate containing 10 to 20 carbon atoms; saturated or unsaturated, linear or branched zinc salts of fatty acids of 2 to 22 carbon atoms, such as those formed with propionic acid isobutyric acid, caproic acid, undecylenic acid, and the like; zinc salts of aminated acylated acids, such as propionylcysteine, propionyl-hydroxyproline or caproylcysteine, WO 00/69484 cA o23~302~ 2ooi-m-o2 PCT/US00/13842 and the like. Lipase inhibitors, such as the foregoing, have been found to be useful at a concentration of about 0.01 % to about 10%.
Still other useful lipase inhibitors, disclosed in European Patent Application Serial No. 97120699.0 entitled "Skin Rash Prevention Composition" filed in the name of Palumbo, et al. on Nobember 26, 1997, the disclosure of which is hereby incorporated by reference, include specific ester compounds that act as a substitute substrate for fecal lipases and thereby are competitive lipase inhibitors. These esters have the formulas:
R6 C ~A~C ~B~--R3 JY ~~~x Y
R1 R2 (1) or I7 i9 R8-C~A~C~B~R3 ~y~ ~x~ ~y C=O C=O
O O
R10 R11 (II) wherein R1 and each R2 independently are an acyl group with from 2 to 22 carbon atoms, or an alkyl, alkenyl, arylalkyl, hydroxyalkyl group with from 1 to 24 carbon atoms or hydrogen, whereby at least one of R1 and R2 is such an acyl group, R3 R4, R5, R6, R7, Rg, and R9 are independently an alkyl, alkenyl, arylalkyl, hydroxyalkyl, alkoxy groups of from 1 to 24 carbon atoms, hydroxy group or hydrogen; R10 and R11 are independently an alkyl, alkenyl, arylalkyl, hydroxyalkyl, alkoxy groups of from 2 to 24 carbon atoms, hydroxy group or hydrogen; A and B are independently a C1-C6 linear or branched alkylene, alkenylene, alkoxylene, hydroxyalkylene groups; the values of x are independently from 0 to 15; the values of y are independently 0 or l, with the proviso that when x =2 and y=0, at least one R2 is an alkyl, alkenyl, arylalkyl, hydroxyalkyl group with from 1 to 24 carbon atoms or hydrogen.
WO 00/69484 cA o23~302~ 2ooi-ii-o2 pCT/LTS00/13842 Still further examples of lipase inhibitors are those disclosed in U.S. patent 5,643,874, hereby incorporated by reference, which include: (2S,3S ,SS)-S-[(S)-formamido-4-methyl-valeryloxy]-2-hexyl-3-hydroxy-hexadecanoic 1,3 acid lactone, also known as tetrahydrolipstatin; (2S ,3S,SS,7Z, lOZ)-S-[(S)-2-formamido-4-methyl-valeryloxy]-2-hexyl-3-hydroxy-7,10-hexadecadienoic 1,3 acid lactone, also known as lipstatin;l-(trans-4-isobutylcyclohexyl)-2-(phenylsulfonyloxy)ethanone, also known as FL-386; 4-methylpiperidine-1-carboxylic acid 4-phenoxyphenyl ester, also known as WAY-121898; N-[3-chloro-4-(trifluoromethyl)phenyl-]N'-[3-(trifluoromethyl)-phenyl]urea, also known as BAY-N-3176; N-formyl-L-valine-(S)-1 -[[(2S, 3S)-3-hexyl-4-oxo-2-oxetanyl]methyl]hexyl ester, also known as valilactone;
(2S,3S,SS,7Z,lOZ)-5-[(S)-2-acetamido-3-carbamoylpropionyloxy]-2-hexyl-3-hydroxy-7,10-hexadecadienoic lactone, also known as esterastin; (3S,4S)-4-[(1S,SR,7S,8R,9R,E)-8-hydroxy 1,3,5,7,9-pentamethyl-6-oxo-3-undecenyl]-3-methyl-2-oxetanone, also known as ebelactone A;
(3S,4S)-3-ethyl-4-[(1 S,SR,7S,8R,9R,E)-8-hydroxy-1,3,5,7,9-pentamethyl-6-oxo-3-undecenyl]-2-oxetanone, also known as ebelactone B; and 1,6-di(O-(carbamoyl)cyclohexanone oxime)hexane, also known as RHC 80267.
Exemplary inhibitors of bile salts that are coenzymes for lipolytic enzymes and are useful as lipase enzyme inhibitors in the absorbent articles include, but are not limited to, cationic compounds disclosed in European Patent Application Serial No.
97120700.6 entitled "Skin Care Composition" filed in the name of Palumbo, et al. on Nobember 26, 1997, the disclosure of which is hereby incorporated by reference. Such compounds have the formulas:
R4 N+ R1 M- (n or ~1 M-R7 RS - I +-R6 R8 x (II) WO 00/69484 cA o23~302~ 2ooi-m-o2 pCT/US00/13842 or an amphoteric compound and preferably an acidity source, the amphoteric compound having at its iso-electric point the formula:
Rl M-Rg-N+-A-BH
Rl0 (III) for preparation of a composition for treatment, prevention or reduction of lipolytic dermatitis of the external skin, wherein Rl, R2, R3 and R4 are independently a Cl-C22 alkyl, alkenyl, aryl, arylalkyl, amidoalkyl, (poly) alkoxy, hydroxyalkyl, or acyl groups, or two or more groups of Rl, R2, R3 and R4 form together one or more ring structures; R5, R6 and A are independently a Cl-C22 alkylene, alkenylene, (poly) alkoxylene, hydroxyalkylene, arylalkylene or amido alkylene groups; R7 and Rg are independently a Cl-C4 alkyl, alkenyl, alkoxy group or a hydroxy group or hydrogen; R9 and Rl0 are independently a Cl-C22 alkyl, alkenyl, aryl, arylalkyl, amidoalkyl, (poly) alkoxy, hydroxyalkyl, or acyl groups, or two or more of the groups Rl, R9 and Rl0 form together one or more ring structures; BH is a proton donating group; x is from 2 to 4;
and M- is a counter ion.
Another exemplary suitable bile salt inhibitor is cholestyramine, described in a publication by C. Michael White et al., entitled "Cholestyramine Ointment to Treat Buttocks Rash and Anal Excoriation in an Infant", The Annals of Pharmacotherapy 30:
954-956, Sept. 1996.
Derivatives of p-guanidinobenzoic acid, especially esters of p-guanidinobenzoic acid, have been described as inhibitors of esterases. Such inhibitors are useful in the skin care compositions of the absorbent articles, and are disclosed in U.S. Patent 5,376,655 issued to Imaki et al. on December 27, 1994, the disclosure of which is hereby incorporated by reference.
Suitable amylase inhibitors and/or glucosidase amylase inhibitors include those disclosed in U.S. patent 5,643,874, hereby incorporated by reference, and include O-4,6-dideoxy-4-[[ [ 1 S-( 1 a,4a,5 (3,6a)]-4,5,6-trihydroxy-3-(hydroxymethyl)-2-cyclohexen-1-yl]amino]-a-D-glucopyranosyl-(1~4)O-a-D-glucopyranosyl-(1-~4)-D-glucose, also known as acarbose; 2(S),3(R),4(S),5(S)-tetrahydroxy-N-[2-hydroxy-1-(hydroxymethyl)-ethyl]-5-(hydroxymethyl)-1(S)-cyclohexamine, also known as voglibose;l,5-dideoxy-1,5-[(2-hydroxyethyl)imino]-D-glucitol, also known as miglitol; 1,5-dideoxy-1,5-[2-(4-ethoxycarbonylphenoxy)-ethylimino]-D-glucitol, also known as emiglitate; 2,6-dideoxy-WO 00/69484 cA o23~302~ 2ooi-ii-o2 PCT/US00/13842 2,6-imino-7-((3-D-glucopyranosyl)-D-glycero-L-guloheptitol, also known as MDL-25637;
1,5-dideoxy-1,5-(6-deoxy-1-O-methyl-a-D-glucopyranos-6-ylimino)-D-glucitol, also known as camiglibose;1,5,9,11,14-pentahydroxy-3-methyl-8,13-dioxo-5,6,8,13-tetrahydrobenzo[a]-naphthacene-2-carboxylic acid, also known pradimicin Q;
also known 5 as adiposine; and 1,2-dideoxy-2-[2(S),3(S),4(R)-trihydroxy-5-(hydroxymethyl)-cyclohexen-1(S)-ylamino]-L-glucopyranose, also known as salbostatin. Other suitable amylase inhibitors include tendamistat, trestatins, and those derived from plants, especially from wheat, rice, maize, barley and other cereal grains, beans, and seaweed.
These and other features of enzyme inhibitors are disclosed in U.S. Patent 10 Application Serial No. 09/041232 entitled "Protease Inhibitors in Absorbent Articles"
filed in the name of Rourke, et al. on March 12, 1998, and U.S. Patent Application Serial No. 09/041266 entitled "Disposable Absorbent Article Having A Skin Care Composition Containing An Enzyme Inhibitor" filed in the name of Roe, et al. on March 12, 1998, both of which are incorporated herein by reference.
15 The skin care active ingredients are soluble or insoluble. Insoluble skin care active ingredients may be dispersed in skin care composition with dispersing agents to form homogeneous mixture of skin care composition. It is preferable that the insoluble skin care active ingredients are pre-dispersed in pre-dispersion solvents with dispersing agents. Pre-dispersion solvents may be petroleum-based, fatty acid ester, alkyl ethoxylate, 20 fatty acid ester ethoxylates, fatty alcohol, polysiloxane, or mixtures of them. Further, pre-dispersion solvents may be soluble skin care active ingredients. Exemplary preferable dispersing agents are diethanolamine polyoxyethylene oleyl ether phosphate, polyhydroxystearic acid, polyglyceryl - 6 polyricinoleate, neopentyl glycol diisostearate, propylene glycol dicaprate, or mixtures thereof. Other possible dispersing agents are 25 isoelcosane and polyisobutene and quaternium 18, phenyltrimethicone and quaternium 18 hectorite and triethyl citrate, isohexadecane and quaternium - 18 hectorite and propylene carbonate, octyldodecanol and quaternium - 18 hectorite and propylene carbonate, mineral oil and quaternium - 18 hectorite and propylene carbonate, isopropyl myristate and stearalkonium hectorite and propylene carbonate, cyclomethicone and 30 quaternium - 18 and SDA 40, lanolin oil and isopropyl palmitate and stearalkonium hectorite and propylene carbonate and propyl paraben, 1 - eicosanol, or mixtures thereof.
4. Other Optional Component Skin care compositions may comprise other optional components. These optional components include water, hydrophilic surfactants, viscosity modifiers, perfumes, film WO 00/69484 cA o23~302~ 2ooi-m-o2 PCT/US00/13842 formers, deodorants, opacifiers, solvents, and the like. Stabilizers may be added to enhance the shelf life of the skin care composition such as cellulose derivatives, proteins and lecithin. Hydrophilic surfactants may be added to promote rapid transfer of the fluid (e.g., urine, menses etc.) from the topsheet to the absorbent inner layers of the article. The detail of such hydrophilic surfactant is disclosed in, e.g.; U.S. Patent 5,643,588 , "Diaper Having a Lotioned Topsheet", issued to Roe, Bakes & Warner on July 1, 1997, which is incorporated herein by reference.
C. Treating Body Contacting Surface With Skin Care Composition In preparing products treated with skin care compositions according to the present invention, the skin care composition is applied onto at least a portion of the body facing surface of absorbent articles. Any of a variety of application methods that evenly distribute viscous materials can be used. Suitable methods include printing, spraying, coating, brushing, extrusion, or combinations of these application techniques.
The minimum level of skin care composition to be applied onto the body contacting surface of the article is an amount effective for providing the skin effects to the wearer. The level of skin care compositions applied will depend on various factors, including the relative amount of surface area of the body contacting surface not treated with skin care composition, expected skin effects of the skin care composition and the like. The amount of the skin care composition can also vary over the body contacting surface. For example, some portions of the body contacting surface can have greater or lesser amounts of skin care composition than the other portions of the body contacting surface, including portions of the surface that do not have any skin care composition on it.
The skin care composition can be applied onto the entire surface of the body contacting surface or selectively onto the portions of the body contacting surface. For example, if the skin care composition is applied to the topsheet of absorbent article, the way of applying the skin care composition onto the topsheet of absorbent articles is preferable such that the skin care composition is distributed primarily on body facing part of the topsheet. However, if the skin care composition is relatively hydrophobic, it is preferable that the skin care composition is not distributed in the fluid path (such as apertures of the topsheet) and does not block the fluid path to ensure the ability of the topsheet to transmit fluid to the underlying absorbent core. Examples of the pattern of the coating include stripes, dots, circles or the Like.
WO 00/69484 cA o23~302~ 2ooi-ii-o2 pCT/IJS00/13842 The skin care composition can be applied to the body contacting surface at any point during assembly. For example, the skin care composition can be applied to the body contacting surface of the finished absorbent article before it has been packaged. The skin care composition can also be applied to the body contacting surface before it is combined with the other raw materials to form the finished absorbent article.
The skin care composition is typically applied from a melt thereof to the article.
Since the skin care composition melts at significantly above ambient temperatures, it is usually applied as a heated coating to the body contacting surface of the article. The temperature is determined considering primarily the melting point of the skin care composition and the other factors such as lowering of the temperature in the manufacturing process of the article. And the skin care composition is often heated to a temperature in the range from 50°C to 100°C, more often from 60°C to 90°C, prior to being applied to the article. Once the melted skin care composition has been applied to the article, it is allowed to cool and solidify to form solidified coating or film on the surface of the body contacting surface. Preferably, the application process is designed to aid in the coolinglset up of the skin care composition. Examples of applying the skin care composition to the body contacting surface is described in, e.g., U.S. Patent 5,643,588, "Diaper Having a Lotioned Topsheet", issued to Roe, Bakes & Warner on July 1, 1997, which is incorporated herein by reference.
SPECIFIC ILLUSTRATIONS OF THE PREPARATION OF TREATED ARTICLE
ACCORDING TO THE PRESENT INVENTION
The following examples further describe and demonstrate the preferred embodiments within the scope of the present invention. The examples are given solely for the purpose of illustration, and are not to be construed as limitations of the present invention since many variants thereof are possible without departing from its spirit and scope.
Example 1 A. Preparation of Skin Care Compositions A water free skin care composition (Skin Care Composition A) is made by mixing the following melted components together: Petrolatum made by Witco Corp.
under the name Super White Protopet~, and Behenyl Alcohol made by Henkel WO 00/69484 cA o23~302~ 2ooi-m-o2 pCT/US00/13842 Corp. under the name Lanette 22. Super White Protopet~ is petrolatum. The ratio of the heavy aliphatic hydrocarbons having alkyl chain length of from 27 to 36 to the light hydrocarbons having alkyl chain length of from 17 to 26 is 2.3:1Ø
The ratio of the heavy aliphatic hydrocarbons having alkyl chain length of from 30 to 36 to the light aliphatic hydrocarbons aliphatic having alkyl chain length of from 20 to 26 is 1.7:1Ø The ratio of the heavy aliphatic hydrocarbons having alkyl chain length of from 33 to 36 to the light aliphatic hydrocarbons aliphatic having alkyl chain length of from 23 to 26 is 1.3:1Ø Lanette 22 is a mixed linear C 1 g-C24 primary alcohol. Lanette 22 contains about 70% of C22 fatty alcohol, about 20 % of C20 alcohol, about 9 % of Clg alcohol, and about 1 % of C24 fatty alcohol. The weight percentages of these components are shown in Table I
below:
WO 00/69484 cA o23~302~ 2ooi-m-o2 PCT/US00/13842 Table I
Component Weight Super White Protopet~ 70 Behenyl Alcohol 30 B. Preparation of Skin Care Composition Treated Article by Hot Melt Printing Skin Care Composition A is placed into a heated tank operating at a temperature of 90°C. The composition is subsequently applied with a contact applicator (using a Meltex EP45 hot melt adhesive applicator head operating at a temperature of 90°C) onto all over the DRI-WEAVE topsheet of Whisper Slim Wing Regular Long manufactured by Procter & Gamble Far East, Inc., at an add-on level = 4 g/m2.
Example 2 A. Preparation of Skin Care Compositions A water free skin care composition (Skin Care Composition B) is made by mixing the following melted components together: Petrolatum made by Witco Corp.
under the name Protopet~ 1 S, and Behenyl Alcohol made by Henkel Corp. under the name Lanette 22. Protopet~ 1 S is petrolatum. The ratio of the heavy aliphatic hydrocarbons having alkyl chain length of from 27 to 36 to the light hydrocarbons having . alkyl chain length of from 17 to 26 is 2.3:1Ø The ratio of the heavy aliphatic hydrocarbons having alkyl chain length of from 30 to 36 to the light aliphatic hydrocarbons aliphatic having alkyl chain length of from 20 to 26 is 1.7:1Ø The ratio of the heavy aliphatic hydrocarbons having alkyl chain length of from 33 to 36 to the light aliphatic hydrocarbons aliphatic having alkyl chain length of from 23 to 26 is 1.3:1Ø Lanette 22 contains about 70% of C22 fatty alcohol, about 20 % of C20 alcohol, about 9 % of C 1 g alcohol, and about 1 %
of C24 fatty alcohol. The weight percentages of these components are shown in Table II below:
Table II
WO 00/69484 cA o23~302~ 2ooi-m-o2 PCT/US00/13842 Component Weight Protopet~ 1 S 80 Behenyl Alcohol 20 B. Preparation of Skin Care Composition Treated Article by Hot Melt Spraying Skin Care Composition B is placed into a heated tank operating at a temperature of 90°C. The composition is subsequently sprayed (using a Dynatec E84B1758 spray 5 head, operating at a temperature of 90°C and an atomization pressure of l6kPa) onto the DRI-WEAVE topsheet of Whisper Slim Wing Regular Long manufactured by Procter & Gamble Far East, Inc., in a couple of stripes which are 40mm wide (lateral direction) and 200mm long (longitudinal direction) at an add-on level = 2 g/m2.
10 Example 3 A. Preparation of Skin Care Composition A water free skin care composition (Skin Care Composition C) is made by mixing the following melted components together: Petrolatum made by Witco Corp.
under the name Super White Protopet~, Behenyl Alcohol made by Henkel Corp.
15 under the name Lanette 22, and Steareth-2 made by ICI America under the name Brij 762. Super White Protopet~ is petrolatum. The ratio of the heavy aliphatic hydrocarbons having alkyl chain length of from 27 to 36 to the light hydrocarbons having alkyl chain length of from 17 to 26 is 2.3:1Ø The ratio of the heavy aliphatic hydrocarbons having alkyl chain length of from 30 to 36 to the light 20 aliphatic hydrocarbons aliphatic having alkyl chain length of from 20 to 26 is 1.7:1Ø The ratio of the heavy aliphatic hydrocarbons having alkyl chain length of from 33 to 36 to the light aliphatic hydrocarbons aliphatic having alkyl chain length of from 23 to 26 is 1.3:1Ø Lanette 22 contains about 70% of C22 fatty alcohol, about 20 % of C20 alcohol, about 9 % of C 1 g alcohol, and about 1 %
of 25 C24 fatty alcohol. Brij 762 is a C 1 g linear alcohol ethoxylate having an average degree of ethoxylation of 2. The weight percentages of these components are shown in Table III below:
WO 00/69484 cA o23~302~ 2ooi-m-o2 PCT/US00/13842 Table III
Component Weight Super White Protopet~ 70 Behenyl Alcohol 1 S
Steareth-2 15 B. Preparation of Skin Care Composition Treated Article by Hot Melt Spraying Skin Care Composition C is placed into a heated tank operating at a temperature of 90°C. The composition is subsequently sprayed (using a Dynatec E84B1758 spray head, operating at a temperature of 80°C and an atomization pressure of l6kPa) onto all over the DRI-WEAVE topsheet of Whisper Slim Wing Regular Long manufactured by Procter & Gamble Far East, Inc., at an add-on level = 4 g/m2.
Example 4 A. Preparation of Skin Care Composition A water free skin care composition (Skin Care Compos~~:~,~n D) is made by mixing the following melted components together: Petrolatum made by Witco Corp.
under the name Protopet~ 1 S, Microcrystalline wax made by Witco Corp. under the name Multiwax~ W-835, and Stearyl Alcohol made by the Procter & Gamble Company under the name COl 895. Protopet~ 1 S is petrolatum. The ratio of the heavy aliphatic hydrocarbons having alkyl chain length of from 27 to 36 to the light hydrocarbons having alkyl chain length of from 17 to 26 is 2.3:1Ø The ratio of the heavy aliphatic hydrocarbons having alkyl chain length of from 30 to 36 to the light aliphatic hydrocarbons aliphatic having alkyl chain length of from 20 to 26 is 1.7:1Ø The ratio of the heavy aliphatic hydrocarbons having alkyl chain length of from 33 to 36 to the light aliphatic hydrocarbons aliphatic having alkyl chain length of from 23 to 26 is 1.3:1Ø Multiwax~ W-835 is microcrystalline wax having a consistency of from 60 to 80 at 25°C measured under ASTM D-1321. C01895 is a linear C 1 g primary alcohol. The weight percentages of these components are shown in Table IV below:
WO 00/69484 cA o23~302~ 2ooi-ii-o2 pCT/US00/13842 Table IV
Component Weight Protopet~ 1 S 70 Microcrystalline Wax 10 Stearyl Alcohol 20 B. Preparation of Skin Care Composition Treated Article by Hot Melt S~rayy Skin Care Composition D is placed into a heated tank operating at a temperature of 90°C. The composition is subsequently sprayed (using a Dynatec spray head, operating at a temperature of 90°C and an atomization pressure of l6kPa) onto the DRI-WEAVE topsheet of Whisper Slim Wing Regular Long manufactured by Procter & Gamble Far East, Inc., in a couple of stripes which is 40mm wide (lateral direction) and 200mm long (longitudinal direction) in an add-on level = 4 g/m2.
Example 5 A. Preparation of Skin Care Composition A water free skin care composition (Skin Care Composition E) is made by mixing the following melted components together: Petrolatum made by Witco Corp.
under the name Protopet~ 1 S, Polyethylene wax made by Witco Corp. under the name Performalene 400~, and Stearyl Alcohol made by the Procter & Gamble Company under the name C01895. Protopet~ 1 S is petrolatum. The ratio of the heavy aliphatic hydrocarbons having alkyl chain length of from 27 to 36 to the light hydrocarbons having alkyl chain length of from 17 to 26 is 2.3:1Ø The ratio of the heavy aliphatic hydrocarbons having alkyl chain length of from 30 to 36 to the light aliphatic hydrocarbons aliphatic having alkyl chain length of from 20 to 26 is 1.7:1Ø The ratio of the heavy aliphatic hydrocarbons having alkyl chain length of from 33 to 36 to the light aliphatic hydrocarbons aliphatic having alkyl chain length of from 23 to 26 is 1.3:1Ø Performalene 400~ is polyethylene wax WO 00/69484 cA o23~302~ 2ooi-ii-o2 pCT/US00/13842 having an average molecular weight of 400. C01895 is a linear Clg primary alcohol. The weight percentages of these components are shown in Table V
below:
Table V
Component Weight Protopet~ 1 S 70 Polyethylene wax 10 Stearyl Alcohol 20 B. Preparation of Skin Care Composition Treated Article by Hot Melt Spraying Skin Care Composition E is placed into a heated tank operating at a temperature of 90°C. The composition is subsequently applied with a contact applicator (using a Meltex EP45 hot melt adhesive applicator head operating at a temperature of 90°C) onto all over the DRI-WEAVE topsheet of Whisper Slim Wing Regular Long manufactured by Procter & Gamble Far East, Inc., at an add-on level = 4 g/m2.
Example 6 A. Preparation of Skin Care Composition A water free skin care composition (Skin Care Composition F) is made by mixing Fumed Silica made by Degussa AG under the name Aerosil 8972 with the following melted components; Petrolatum made by Witco Corp. under the name Super White Protopet~, and Behenyl Alcohol made by Henkel Corp. under the name Lanette 22. These are mixed by a high speed blade mixer (Tokusyu Kika TK Robo Mics, operating at SOOOrpm). Super White Protopet~ is petrolatum.
The ratio of the heavy aliphatic hydrocarbons having alkyl chain length of from 27 to 36 to the light hydrocarbons having alkyl chain length of from 17 to 26 is 2.3:1Ø The ratio of the heavy aliphatic hydrocarbons having alkyl chain length of from 30 to 36 to the light aliphatic hydrocarbons aliphatic having alkyl chain length of from 20 to 26 is 1.7:1Ø The ratio of the heavy aliphatic hydrocarbons WO 00/69484 cA o23~302~ 2ooi-m-o2 PCT/US00/13842 having alkyl chain length of from 33 to 36 to the light aliphatic hydrocarbons aliphatic having alkyl chain length of from 23 to 26 is 1.3:1Ø Lunette 22 contains about 70% of C22 fatty alcohol, about 20 % of C20 alcohol, about 9 % of C 1 g alcohol, and about 1 % of C24 fatty alcohol. Aerosil 8972 is fumed silica surface-treated by dimethylsilicone and has an average diameter of less than 1 Vim.
The weight percentages of these components are shown in Table VI below:
Table VI
Component Weight Super White Protopet~70 Behenyl Alcohol 20 Fumed Silica 10 B. Pr~aration of Skin Care Composition Treated Article by Hot Melt Printing Skin Care Composition F is placed into a heated tank operating at a temperature of 90°C. The composition is subsequently applied with a contact applicator (using a Meltex EP45 hot melt adhesive applicator head operating at a temperature of 90°C) onto all over the DRI-WEAVE topsheet of Whisper Slim Wing Regular Long manufactured by Procter & Gamble Far East, Inc., at an add-on level = 4 g/m2.
Example 7 A. Preparation of Skin Care Composition A water free skin care composition (Skin Care Composition G) is made by mixing Bentonite Clay made by Rheox Inc. under the name Bentone 38 with the following melted components; Petrolatum made by Witco Corp. under the name Protopet~
1 S, and Behenyl Alcohol made by Henkel Corp. under the name Lunette 22.
These are mixed by a high speed blade mixer (Tokusyu Kika TK Robo Mics, operating at SOOOrpm). Protopet~1S is petrolatum. The ratio of the heavy aliphatic hydrocarbons having alkyl chain length of from 27 to 36 to the light hydrocarbons having alkyl chain length of from 17 to 26 is 2.3:1Ø The ratio of WO 00/69484 cA o23~302~ 2ooi-ii-o2 pCT/US00/13842 the heavy aliphatic hydrocarbons having alkyl chain length of from 30 to 36 to the light aliphatic hydrocarbons aliphatic having alkyl chain length of from 20 to 26 is 1.7:1Ø The ratio of the heavy aliphatic hydrocarbons having alkyl chain length of from 33 to 36 to the light aliphatic hydrocarbons aliphatic having alkyl chain 5 length of from 23 to 26 is 1.3:1Ø Lanette 22 contains about 70% of C22 fatty alcohol, about 20 % of C20 alcohol, about 9 % of C 1 g alcohol, and about 1 %
of C24 fatty alcohol. Bentone 38 is bentonite clay surface-treated by ammonium salt and has an average diameter of less than 5pm. The weight percentages of these components are shown in Table VII below:
10 Table VII
Component Weight Protopet~ 1 S 70 Behenyl Alcohol 20 Bentone 10 B. Preparation of Skin Care Composition Treated Article byHot Melt Printing Skin Care Composition G is placed into a heated tank operating at a temperature of 90°C. The composition is subsequently applied with a contact applicator (using 15 a Meltex EP45 hot melt adhesive applicator head operating at a temperature of 90°C) onto all over the DRI-WEAVE topsheet of Whisper Slim Wing Regular Long manufactured by Procter & Gamble Far East, Inc., at an add-on level = 4 g/m2.
Example 8 20 A. Preparation of Skin Care Compositions A water free skin care composition (Skin Care Composition H) is made by mixing zinc oxide made by Zinc Corporation of America under the name USP-1 with mineral oil made by Shell Co. under the name of Kaydol as a pre-dispersion solvent for zinc oxide, polyglyceryl-6 polyricinoleate made by Nikko Chemicals Co. Ltd. under the name 25 Hexaglyn PR15 as a dispersing agent for zinc oxide and the following melted WO 00/69484 cA o23~302~ 2ooi-m-o2 PCT/US00/13842 components; Petrolatum made by Witco Corp. under the name Super White Protopet~, and Behenyl Alcohol made by Henkel Corp. under the name Lunette 22. These are mixed by a high speed blade mixer (Tokusyu Kika TK Robo Mics, operating at SOOOrpm) at 90°C. Super White Protopet~ is petrolatum. The ratio of the heavy aliphatic hydrocarbons having alkyl chain length of from 27 to 36 to the light hydrocarbons having alkyl chain length of from 17 to 26 is 2.3:1Ø The ratio of the heavy aliphatic hydrocarbons having alkyl chain length of from 30 to 36 to the light aliphatic hydrocarbons aliphatic having alkyl chain length of from 20 to 26 is 1.7:1Ø
The ratio of the heavy aliphatic hydrocarbons having alkyl chain length of from 33 to 36 to the light aliphatic hydrocarbons aliphatic having alkyl chain length of from 23 to 26 is 1.3:1Ø Lunette 22 contains about 70% of C22 fatty alcohol, about 20 % of alcohol, about 9 % of C 1 g alcohol, and about 1 % of C24 fatty alcohol. USP-1 is zinc oxide having an average particle diameter of about 0.1-1.0 pm. The weight percentages of the components are shown in Table VIII below:
Table VIII
Component Weight Super White Protopet~ 67 Behenyl Alcohol 30 Zinc Oxide 2.0 Mineral Oil 0.7 Hexaglyn PR15 0.3 B. Preparation of Skin Care Composition Treated Article by Hot Melt Printing Skin Care Composition H is placed into a heated tank operating at a temperature of 90°C. The composition is subsequently applied with a contact applicator (using a Meltex EP45 hot melt adhesive applicator head operating at a temperature of 90°C) onto all over the DRI-WEAVE topsheet of Whisper Slim Wing Regular Long manufactured by Procter & Gamble Far East, Inc., at an add-on level = 4 g/m2.
WO 00/69484 cA o23~302~ 2ooi-ii-o2 pCT/US00/13842 Example 9 A. Preparation of Skin Care Composition A water free skin care composition (Skin Care Composition n is made by mixing zinc oxide made by Zinc Corporation of America under the name USP-1 with mineral oil made by Shell Co. under the name of Kaydol as a pre-dispersion solvent for zinc oxide, diethanolamine polyoxyethylene oleyl ether phosphate made by Croda Inc. under the name Crodafos N3N as a dispersing agent for zinc oxide and the following melted components; Petrolatum made by Witco Corp. under the name Protopet~ 1 S, and Behenyl Alcohol made by Henkel Corp. under the name Lanette 22. These are mixed by a high speed blade mixer (Tokusyu Kika TK Robo Mics, operating at SOOOrpm) at 90°C. Protopet~ 1 S is petrolatum. The ratio of the heavy aliphatic hydrocarbons having alkyl chain length of from 27 to 36 to the light hydrocarbons having alkyl chain length of from 17 to 26 is 2.3:1Ø The ratio of the heavy aliphatic hydrocarbons having alkyl chain length of from 30 to 36 to the light aliphatic hydrocarbons aliphatic having alkyl chain length of from 20 to 26 is 1.7:1Ø The ratio of the heavy aliphatic hydrocarbons having alkyl chain length of from 33 to 36 to the light aliphatic hydrocarbons aliphatic having alkyl chain length of from 23 to 26 is 1.3:1Ø Lanette 22 contains about 70% of C22 fatty alcohol, about 20 % of C20 alcohol, about 9 % of Clg alcohol, and about 1 of C24 fatty alcohol. . USP-1 is zinc oxide having an average particle diameter of about 0.1-1.0 Vim. The weight percentages of the components are shown in Table IX
below:
WO 00/69484 cA o23~302~ 2ooi-ii-o2 pCT/US00/13842 Table IX
Component Weight Protopet~ 1 S 65 Behenyl Alcohol 30 Zinc Oxide 3.0 Mineral Oil 1.0 Crodafos N3N 1.0 B. Preparation of Skin Care Composition Treated Article by Hot Melt Printing Skin Care Composition I is placed into a heated tank operating at a temperature of 90°C. The composition is subsequently applied with a contact applicator (using a Meltex EP45 hot melt adhesive applicator head operating at a temperature of 90°C) onto all over the DRI-WEAVE topsheet of Whisper Slim Wing Regular Long manufactured by Procter & Gamble Far East, Inc., at an add-on level = 3 g/m2.
Example 10 A. Preparation of Skin Care Composition A water free skin care composition (Skin Care Composition J) is made by mixing zinc oxide made by Zinc Corporation of America under the name USP-1 with mineral oil made by Shell Co. under the name of Kaydol as a pre-dispersion solvent for zinc oxide, polyhydroxystearic acid made by ICI Inc. under the name Arlacel P 100 as a dispersing agent for zinc oxide and the following melted components; Petrolatum made by Witco Corp. under the name Super White Protopet~, Behenyl Alcohol made by Henkel Corp.
under the name Lanette 22, and Steareth-2 made by ICI America under the name Brij 762. These are mixed by a high speed blade mixer (Tokusyu Kika TK Robo Mics, operating at SOOOrpm) at 90°C. Super White Protopet~ is petrolatum. The ratio of the heavy aliphatic hydrocarbons having alkyl chain length of from 27 to 36 to the light hydrocarbons having alkyl chain length of from 17 to 26 is 2.3:1Ø The ratio of the WO 00/69484 cA o23~302~ 2ooi-m-o2 PCT/US00/13842 heavy aliphatic hydrocarbons having alkyl chain length of from 30 to 36 to the light aliphatic hydrocarbons aliphatic having alkyl chain length of from 20 to 26 is 1.7:1Ø
The ratio of the heavy aliphatic hydrocarbons having alkyl chain length of from 33 to 36 to the light aliphatic hydrocarbons aliphatic having alkyl chain length of from 23 to 26 is 1.3:1Ø Lanette 22 contains about 70% of C22 fatty alcohol, about 20 % of alcohol, about 9 % of Clg alcohol, and about 1 % of C24 fatty alcohol. Brij 762 is a Clg linear alcohol ethoxylate having an average degree of ethoxylation of 2. .
USP-1 is zinc oxide having an average particle diameter of about 0.1-1.0 Vim. The weight percentages of the components are shown in Table X below:
Table X
Component Weight Super White Protopet~65 Behenyl Alcohol 25 Steareth-2 5.0 Zinc Oxide 3.0 Mineral Oil 1.0 Arlacel P 100 1.0 B. Preparation of Skin Care Composition Treated Article by Hot Melt Spraying Skin Care Composition J is placed into a heated tank operating at a temperature of 90°C. The composition is subsequently sprayed (using a Dynatec E84B1758 spray head, operating at a temperature of 80°C and an atomization pressure of l6kPa) onto all over the DRI-WEAVE topsheet of Whisper Slim Wing Regular Long manufactured by Procter & Gamble Far East, Inc., at an add-on level = 5 g/m2.
Example 11 A. Preparation of Skin Care Composition WO 00/69484 cA o23~302~ 2ooi-ii-o2 PCT/US00/13842 A water free skin care composition (Skin Care Composition K) is made by mixing zinc oxide made by Zinc Corporation of America under the name USP-1 with mineral oil made by Shell Co. under the name of Kaydol as a pre-dispersion solvent for zinc oxide, propylene glycol dicaprate made by Abitec Performance Products under the name 5 Captex 100 as a dispersing agent for zinc oxide and the following melted components;
Petrolatum made by Witco Corp. under the name Protopet~ 1 S, Behenyl Alcohol made by Henkel Corp. under the name Lanette 22, and Microcrystalline wax made by Witco Corp. under the name Multiwax~ W-835. These are mixed by a high speed blade mixer (Tokusyu Kika TK Robo Mics, operating at SOOOrpm) at 90°C.
Protopet~ 1 S is 1'0 petrolatum. The ratio of the heavy aliphatic hydrocarbons having alkyl chain length of from 27 to 36 to the light hydrocarbons having alkyl chain length of from 17 to 26 is 2.3:1Ø The ratio of the heavy aliphatic hydrocarbons having alkyl chain length of from 30 to 36 to the light aliphatic hydrocarbons aliphatic having alkyl chain length of from 20 to 26 is 1.7:1Ø The ratio of the heavy aliphatic hydrocarbons having alkyl chain 15 length of from 33 to 36 to the light aliphatic hydrocarbons aliphatic having alkyl chain length of from 23 to 26 is 1.3:1Ø Lanette 22 contains about 70% of C22 fatty alcohol, about 20 % of C20 alcohol, about 9 % of C 1 g alcohol, and about 1 % of C24 fatty alcohol. Multiwax~ W-835 is microcrystalline wax having a consistency of from 60 to 80 at 25°C measured under ASTM D-1321. . USP-1 is zinc oxide having an average 20 particle diameter of about 0.1-1.0 pm. The weight percentages of the components are shown in Table XI below:
WO 00/69484 cA o23~302~ 2ooi-m-o2 PCT/US00/13842 Table XI
Component Weight Protopet~ 1 S 57 Behenyl Alcohol 30 Microcrystalline Wax 5.0 Zinc Oxide 5.0 Mineral Oil 2.0 Captex 100 1.0 B. Preparation of Skin Care Composition Treated Article by Hot Melt Spraying Skin Care Composition K is placed into a heated tank operating at a temperature of 90°C. The composition is subsequently sprayed (using a Dynatec spray head, operating at a temperature of 90°C and an atomization pressure of l6kPa) onto the DRI-WEAVE topsheet of Whisper Slim Wing Regular Long manufactured by Procter & Gamble Far East, Inc., in a couple of stripes which is 40mm wide (lateral direction) and 200mm long (longitudinal direction) in an add on level = 4 g/m2.
Example 12 A. Preparation of Skin Care Composition A water free skin care composition (Skin Care Composition L) is made by mixing zinc oxide made by Zinc Corporation of America under the name USP-1 with mineral oil made by Shell Co. under the name of Kaydol as a pre-dispersion solvent for zinc oxide, propylene glycol dicaprate made by Abitec Performance Products under the name Captex 100 as a dispersing agent for zinc oxide and the following melted components;
Petrolatum made by Witco Corp. under the name Super White Protopet~ , Behenyl Alcohol made by Henkel Corp. under the name Lanette 22, Stearyl Alcohol made by Procter and Gamble Company under the name C01895, and Microcrystalline wax made WO 00/69484 cA o23~302~ 2ooi-ii-o2 PCT/LTS00/13842 by Witco Corp. under the name Multiwax~ W-835. These are mixed by a high speed blade mixer (Tokusyu Kika TK Robo Mics, operating at SOOOrpm) at 90°C.
Super White Protopet~ is petrolatum. The ratio of the heavy aliphatic hydrocarbons having alkyl chain length of from 27 to 36 to the light hydrocarbons having alkyl chain length of from 17 to 26 is 2.3:1Ø The ratio of the heavy aliphatic hydrocarbons having alkyl chain length of from 30 to 36 to the light aliphatic hydrocarbons aliphatic having alkyl chain length of from 20 to 26 is 1.7:1Ø The ratio of the heavy aliphatic hydrocarbons having alkyl chain length of from 33 to 36 to the light aliphatic hydrocarbons aliphatic having alkyl chain length of from 23 to 26 is 1.3:1Ø C01895 is a linear Clg primary alcohol. Multiwax~ W-835 is microcrystalline wax having a consistency of from 60 to 80 at 25°C measured under ASTM D-1321. . USP-1 is zinc oxide having an average particle diameter of about 0.1-1.0 Vim. The weight percentages of the components are shown in Table XII below:
WO 00/69484 cA o23~302~ 2ooi-m-o2 PCT/US00/13842 Table XII
Component Weight Super White Protopet~ 48 Behenyl Alcohol 25 Stearyl Alcohol 10 Microcrystalline Wax 10 Zinc Oxide 4.0 Mineral Oil 1.0 Captex 100 2.0 B. Preparation of Skin Care Composition Treated Article by Hot Melt Printing Skin Care Composition L is placed into a heated tank operating at a temperature of 90°C. The composition is subsequently applied with a contact applicator (using a Meltex EP45 hot melt adhesive applicator head opers~vng at a temperature of 90°C) onto all over the DRI-WEAVE topsheet of Whisper Slim Wing Regular Long manufactured by Procter & Gamble Far East, Inc., at an add-on level = 6 g/m2.
It -should also be understood that all of the limits and ranges specified herein include all narrower ranges, limits, and amounts that are within the specified limits and ranges and that such narrower ranges and limits may be claimed even though those limits and ranges are not separately listed.
While particular embodiments of the present invention have been illustrated and described, it would be obvious to those skilled in the art that various other changes and modifications can be made without departing from the spirit and scope of the invention.
Claims (36)
1. ~An absorbent article comprising a body contacting surface and an absorbent core, wherein (1) at least a portion of the body contacting surface comprises an effective amount of a skin care composition which is solid or semisolid at 40°C and which is transferable from the body contacting surface to the wearer's skin by contact, normal wearer motion and body heat at a level effective in providing a skin benefit to the wearer's skin, and (2) the skin care composition has viscosity of more than about 105 Poise under shear stress of less than about 3X104 dynes/cm2, and viscosity of less than about Poise under shear stress of more than about 106 dynes/cm2, at 40°C.
2. The absorbent article of Claim 1 wherein the skin care composition has viscosity of more than about 10 6 Poise under shear stress of less than about 3X10 4 dynes/cm2 at 40°C.
3. ~The absorbent article of Claim 2 wherein the skin care composition has viscosity of less than about 10 1 Poise under shear stress of more than about 10 6 dynes/cm2 at 40°C.
4. ~The absorbent article of Claim 3 wherein the skin care composition has consistency of not more than about 300 at 40°C.
5. ~The absorbent article of Claim 4 wherein the skin care composition has consistency of not more than about 150 at 40°C.
6. ~The absorbent article of Claim 5 wherein the skin care composition has consistency of not more than about 100 at 40°C.
7. ~The absorbent article of Claim 6 wherein the skin care composition comprises from about 40 to about 90 % of an emollient and from about 10 to about 60 % of an agent immobilizing the emollient.
8. ~The absorbent article of Claim 7 wherein the emollient is selected from the group consisting of petroleum-based, fatty acid ester type, alkyl ethoxylate type, fatty acid ester ethoxylates, fatty alcohol type, polysiloxane type, and mixtures of them.
9. The absorbent article of Claim 8 wherein the emollient is petrolatum.
10. The absorbent article of Claim 9 wherein petrolatum comprises a heavy aliphatic hydrocarbons and a light aliphatic hydrocarbons, wherein petrolatum contains the heavy aliphatic hydrocarbons more than the light aliphatic hydrocarbons.
11. The absorbent article of Claim 10 wherein the heavy aliphatic hydrocarbons have alkyl chain length of from 33-36 and light aliphatic hydrocarbons have alkyl chain length of from 23-26, wherein the ratio of the heavy aliphatic hydrocarbons to the light aliphatic hydrocarbons is between 2.0:1.0 and 1.0:1Ø
12. The absorbent article of Claim 11 wherein the ratio of the heavy aliphatic hydrocarbons to the light aliphatic hydrocarbons is between 1.5:1.0 and 1.0:1Ø
13. The absorbent article of Claim 10 wherein the heavy aliphatic hydrocarbons have alkyl chain length of from 30-36 and light aliphatic hydrocarbons have alkyl chain length of from 20-26, wherein the ratio of the heavy aliphatic hydrocarbons to the light aliphatic hydrocarbons is between 2.5:1.0 and 1.0:1Ø
14. The absorbent article of Claim 13 wherein the ratio of the heavy aliphatic hydrocarbons to the light aliphatic hydrocarbons is between 2.0:1.0 and 1.0:1Ø
15. The absorbent article of Claim 10 wherein the heavy aliphatic hydrocarbons have alkyl chain length of from 27-36 and light aliphatic hydrocarbons have alkyl chain length of from 17-26, wherein the ratio of the heavy aliphatic hydrocarbons to the light aliphatic hydrocarbons is between 3.5:1.0 and 1.5:1Ø
16. The absorbent article of Claim 15 wherein the ratio of the heavy aliphatic hydrocarbons to the light aliphatic hydrocarbons is between 3.0:1.0 and 2.0:1Ø
17. The absorbent article of Claim 7 wherein the immobilizing agent is soluble in the emollient.
18. The absorbent article of Claim 17 wherein the immobilizing agent is selected from the group consisting of C14-C24 fatty alcohols, C12-C24 fatty acids, and C12-fatty alcohol ethoxylates, waxes, and mixtures thereof.
19. The absorbent article of Claim 18 wherein the immobilizing agent is C14-C24 fatty alcohol.
20. The absorbent article of Claim 19 wherein the immobilizing agent is C18-C24 fatty alcohol.
21. The absorbent article of Claim 20 wherein the immobilizing agent is behenyl alcohol.
22. The absorbent article of Claim 21 wherein behenyl alcohol comprises from about 50 to about 99.99% of C22 fatty,alcohol, from 0% to about 27% of C20 fatty alcohol, from 0% to about 20% of C18 fatty alcohol, and from about 0.01% to about 3% of C24 fatty alcohol.
23. The absorbent article of Claim 22 wherein behenyl alcohol comprises from about 63 to about 84.9% of C22 fatty alcohol, from about 10% to about 20% of C20 fatty alcohol, from about 5% to about 15% of C18 fatty alcohol, and from about 0.1 to about 2% of C24 fatty alcohol.
24. The absorbent article of Claim 7 wherein the immobilizing agent is insoluble in the emollient.
25. The absorbent article of Claim 24 wherein the immobilizing agent is a particulate thickener selected from the group consisting of silica, treated silica, fumed silica, polymethacrylate polymers, polymethacrylate and styrene copolymers, calcium silicate, treated calcium silicate, treated bentonite, treated hectorite, and mixtures thereof.
26. The absorbent article of Claim 25 wherein the immobilizing agent is selected from fumed silica, treated bentonite, treated hectorite, and mixtures thereof.
27. The absorbent article of Claim 26 wherein the particulate thickener has an average diameter of less than about 100 microns.
28. The absorbent article of Claim 27 wherein the particulate thickener has an average diameter of less than about 20 microns.
29. The absorbent article of Claim 28 wherein the particulate thickener has an average diameter of less than about 10 microns.
30. An absorbent article comprising a body contacting surface and an absorbent core, wherein (1) at least a portion of the body contacting surface comprises an effective amount of a skin care composition which is solid or semisolid at 40°C and which is transferable from the body contacting surface to the wearer's skin by contact, normal wearer motion and body heat at a level effective in providing a skin benefit to the wearer's skin, (2) the skin care composition comprises a skin care active ingredient, and (3) the skin care composition has viscosity of more than about 10 5 Poise under shear stress of less than about 3X10 4 dynes/cm2, and viscosity of less than about Poise under shear stress of more than about 10 6 dynes/cm2, at 40°C.
31. The absorbent article of Claim 30 wherein the skin care active ingredient is selected from the group consisting of skin care agents, proton donating agents, enzyme inhibitors, and mixtures thereof.
32. The absorbent article of Claim 31 wherein the skin care active ingredient is the skin care agent.
33. The absorbent article of Claim 32 wherein the skin care composition comprises from about 0.001% to about 50% of the skin care agent.
34. The absorbent article of Claim 33 wherein the skin care agent is selected from the group consisting of allantoin, aluminum hydroxide gel. calamine, cocoa butter, dimethicone, cod liver oil, glycerine, kaolin, petrolatum, lanolin, mineral oil, shark liver oil, white petrolatum, talc, topical starch, zinc acetate, zinc carbonate, zinc oxide, live yeast cell derivatives, aldioxa, aluminum acetate, microporous cellulose, cholecalciferol, colloidal oatmeal, cysteine hydrochloride, dexpanthenol, Peruvean balsam oil, protein hydrolysates, racemic methionine, sodium bicarbonate, Vitamin A, buffered mixture of cation and anion exchange resins, corn starch, trolamine, bizmuth subnitrate, boric acid, ferric chloride, polyvinyl pyrrolidone - vinyl acetate copolymers, sulfur, tannic acid, and mixtures thereof.
35. The absorbent article of Claim 30 wherein the skin care active ingredient is insoluble, wherein the insoluble skin care active ingredient is dispersed in skin care composition with a dispersing agent.
36. The absorbent article of Claim 35 wherein the dispersing agent is selected from the group consisting of diethanolamine polyoxyethylene oleyl ether phosphate, polyhydroxystearic acid, polyglyceryl - 6 polyricinoleate, neopentyl glycol diisostearate, propylene glycol dicaprate, isoelcosane and polyisobutene and quaternium 18, phenyltrimethicone and quaternium - 18 hectorite and triethyl citrate, isohexadecane and quaternium - 18 hectorite and propylene carbonate, octyldodecanol and quaternium - 18 hectorite and propylene carbonate, mineral oil and quaternium - 18 hectorite and propylene carbonate, isopropyl myristate and stearalkonium hectorite and propylene carbonate, cyclomethicone and quaternium -18 and SDA 40, lanolin oil and isopropyl palmitate and stearalkonium hectorite and propylene carbonate and propyl paraben, 1 - eicosanol, and mixtures thereof.
Applications Claiming Priority (7)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
US9910986 | 1999-05-19 | ||
USPCT/US99/10986 | 1999-05-19 | ||
USPCT/US99/11374 | 1999-05-21 | ||
USPCT/US99/11330 | 1999-05-21 | ||
PCT/US1999/011374 WO2000069481A1 (en) | 1999-05-19 | 1999-05-21 | Absorbent article with skin care composition |
US9911330 | 1999-05-21 | ||
PCT/US2000/013842 WO2000069484A1 (en) | 1999-05-19 | 2000-05-19 | Absorbent article with skin care composition |
Publications (1)
Publication Number | Publication Date |
---|---|
CA2373027A1 true CA2373027A1 (en) | 2000-11-23 |
Family
ID=27378742
Family Applications (1)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
CA002373027A Abandoned CA2373027A1 (en) | 1999-05-19 | 2000-05-19 | Absorbent article with skin care composition |
Country Status (6)
Country | Link |
---|---|
EP (1) | EP1178845A1 (en) |
AU (1) | AU5146500A (en) |
CA (1) | CA2373027A1 (en) |
MX (1) | MXPA01011795A (en) |
TW (1) | TW446556B (en) |
WO (1) | WO2000069484A1 (en) |
Families Citing this family (20)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US6756520B1 (en) | 2000-10-20 | 2004-06-29 | Kimberly-Clark Worldwide, Inc. | Hydrophilic compositions for use on absorbent articles to enhance skin barrier |
KR100753760B1 (en) * | 2000-12-21 | 2007-08-31 | 주식회사 엘지생활건강 | Disposable absorptive product for prevention of rash |
US7771735B2 (en) | 2000-12-22 | 2010-08-10 | Kimberly-Clark Worldwide, Inc. | Absorbent articles with compositions for reducing irritation response |
US6749860B2 (en) | 2000-12-22 | 2004-06-15 | Kimberly-Clark Worldwide, Inc. | Absorbent articles with non-aqueous compositions containing botanicals |
US7005557B2 (en) * | 2001-07-03 | 2006-02-28 | The Procter & Gamble Company | Film-forming compositions for protecting skin from body fluids and articles made therefrom |
DE10225943A1 (en) | 2002-06-11 | 2004-01-08 | Basf Ag | Process for the preparation of esters of polyalcohols |
JP4244128B2 (en) * | 2002-10-03 | 2009-03-25 | ユニ・チャーム株式会社 | Surface sheet for interlabial pad construction and interlabial pad |
BR0207052A (en) | 2002-10-15 | 2004-08-10 | Natura Cosmeticos Sa | Solid Cosmetic Makeup |
US7320436B2 (en) | 2003-02-28 | 2008-01-22 | Sca Hygiene Products Ab | Method of producing an absorbent article and an absorbent article produced according to the method |
EP1452104B1 (en) * | 2003-02-28 | 2011-04-20 | SCA Hygiene Products AB | Method of producing an absorbent article and an absorbent article produced according to the method |
US20050059941A1 (en) * | 2003-09-11 | 2005-03-17 | Kimberly-Clark Worldwide, Inc. | Absorbent product with improved liner treatment |
US7485373B2 (en) | 2003-09-11 | 2009-02-03 | Kimberly-Clark Worldwide, Inc. | Lotioned tissue product with improved stability |
US7547443B2 (en) | 2003-09-11 | 2009-06-16 | Kimberly-Clark Worldwide, Inc. | Skin care topical ointment |
KR101651675B1 (en) | 2009-10-30 | 2016-08-29 | 유한킴벌리 주식회사 | Absorbent article with annular absorbent member |
WO2013159295A1 (en) | 2012-04-25 | 2013-10-31 | Kimberly-Clark Worldwide, Inc. | Absorbent personal care articles having longitudinally oriented layers in discrete portions |
KR102091634B1 (en) | 2012-12-04 | 2020-03-20 | 킴벌리-클라크 월드와이드, 인크. | An absorbent article with a multi-layered topsheet |
JP6418793B2 (en) * | 2014-06-06 | 2018-11-07 | ユニ・チャーム株式会社 | Absorbent articles |
JP5677611B1 (en) * | 2014-06-30 | 2015-02-25 | ユニ・チャーム株式会社 | Absorbent articles |
TWI772504B (en) * | 2017-09-01 | 2022-08-01 | 日商優你 嬌美股份有限公司 | Warm items |
US10723682B2 (en) * | 2017-11-24 | 2020-07-28 | Biophone India Pharmaceuticals PVT, Ltd. | Process for the synthesis of docosanol |
Family Cites Families (10)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
DE3309530C1 (en) * | 1983-03-17 | 1984-10-25 | Vereinigte Papierwerke Schickedanz & Co, 8500 Nürnberg | Hygienic absorption pad |
US5643588A (en) * | 1994-11-28 | 1997-07-01 | The Procter & Gamble Company | Diaper having a lotioned topsheet |
US6803496B2 (en) * | 1997-09-10 | 2004-10-12 | The Procter & Gamble Company | Method for maintaining or improving skin health |
US6156024A (en) * | 1996-12-03 | 2000-12-05 | The Procter & Gamble Company | Absorbent articles having lotioned leg cuffs |
US5618522A (en) * | 1995-01-20 | 1997-04-08 | The Procter & Gamble Company | Emulsion compositions |
US5869033A (en) * | 1996-04-12 | 1999-02-09 | Enviroderm Pharmaceuticals,Inc. | Method of preventing skin irritation caused by fecal enzymes |
US5891126A (en) * | 1996-08-30 | 1999-04-06 | The Procter & Gamble Company | Absorbent interlabial device treated with a polysiloxane emollient |
US5871763A (en) * | 1997-04-24 | 1999-02-16 | Fort James Corporation | Substrate treated with lotion |
US6120783A (en) * | 1997-10-31 | 2000-09-19 | The Procter & Gamble Company | Web materials with two or more skin care compositions disposed thereon and articles made therefrom |
WO1999045973A1 (en) * | 1998-03-12 | 1999-09-16 | The Procter & Gamble Company | Disposable absorbent article having a skin care composition containing an enzyme inhibitor |
-
2000
- 2000-05-19 AU AU51465/00A patent/AU5146500A/en not_active Abandoned
- 2000-05-19 WO PCT/US2000/013842 patent/WO2000069484A1/en not_active Application Discontinuation
- 2000-05-19 MX MXPA01011795A patent/MXPA01011795A/en active IP Right Grant
- 2000-05-19 EP EP00936104A patent/EP1178845A1/en not_active Withdrawn
- 2000-05-19 CA CA002373027A patent/CA2373027A1/en not_active Abandoned
- 2000-05-19 TW TW089109675A patent/TW446556B/en active
Also Published As
Publication number | Publication date |
---|---|
TW446556B (en) | 2001-07-21 |
WO2000069484A1 (en) | 2000-11-23 |
EP1178845A1 (en) | 2002-02-13 |
AU5146500A (en) | 2000-12-05 |
MXPA01011795A (en) | 2002-04-24 |
Similar Documents
Publication | Publication Date | Title |
---|---|---|
AU769785B2 (en) | Absorbent article having barrier sheet against the migration of the skin care composition | |
CA2373138C (en) | Absorbent article with skin care composition | |
CA2368584A1 (en) | Absorbent article with skin care composition | |
US6703536B2 (en) | Disposable absorbent article having a skin care composition containing an enzyme inhibitor | |
JP4672140B2 (en) | Disposable absorbent products having skin care compositions containing enzyme inhibitors | |
EP1061963B1 (en) | Protease inhibitors in absorbent articles | |
CA2373027A1 (en) | Absorbent article with skin care composition | |
US20050129651A1 (en) | Sanitary napkins with hydrophobic lotions | |
WO2000069485A1 (en) | Absorbent article with skin care composition | |
JP4698844B2 (en) | Absorbent article having skin care composition | |
ZA200202078B (en) | Absorbent article having barrier sheet against the migration of the skin care composition. | |
MXPA00008934A (en) | Disposable absorbent article having a skin care composition containing an enzyme inhibitor |
Legal Events
Date | Code | Title | Description |
---|---|---|---|
EEER | Examination request | ||
FZDE | Discontinued |